Vivotek AW-GEV-107A-130 Switch User Manual PDF

1 of 410
1 of 410

Summary of Content for Vivotek AW-GEV-107A-130 Switch User Manual PDF

i User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

1 i

AW-GEV-107A-130

AW-GEV-267A-370

L2+ Managed PoE Switch

User Manual

2017, Manufacture Corporation. All rights reserved. All brand and product names are trademarks or registered

trademarks of their respective companies

ii User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

2 ii

About This Manual

Copyright Copyright 2017 VIVOTEK Inc. All rights reserved.

The products and programs described in this Users Manual are licensed products of

VIVOTEK Inc., This Users Manual contains proprietary information protected by

copyright, and this Users Manual and all accompanying hardware, software and

documentation are copyrighted. No parts of this Users manual may be copied,

photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic medium or

machine-readable from by any means by electronic or mechanical. Including

photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems, for any purpose

other than the purchasers personal use, and without the prior express written

permission of VIVOTEK Inc.

Purpose This manual gives specific information on how to operate and use the management

functions of the AW-GEV-107A-130 and AW-GEV-267A-370

Audience The Manual is intended for use by network administrators who are responsible for

operating and maintaining network equipment; consequently, it assumes a basic

working knowledge of general switch functions, the Internet Protocol (IP), and web

management (HTTP/HTTPs).

iv User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

4 iv

Table of Contents

Revision History .......................................................................................................................................... ix

INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 1

CHAPTER 1 OPERATION OF WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT ............................................................ 2

CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................ 7

2-1 SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 2-1.1 Information ........................................................................................................................................ 7 2-1.2 IP ......................................................................................................................................................... 7 2-1.3 NTP ................................................................................................................................................... 10 2-1.4 Time .................................................................................................................................................. 11 2-1.5 Log .................................................................................................................................................... 14

2-2 GREEN ETHERNET ........................................................................................................................................ 15 2-2.1 Port Power Savings .......................................................................................................................... 15

2-3 PORTS CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................... 18 2-3.1 Ports .................................................................................................................................................. 18 2-3.2 Ports Description ............................................................................................................................. 21

2-4 DHCP ........................................................................................................................................................ 22 2-4.1 Server ................................................................................................................................................ 22

2-4.1.1 Mode .......................................................................................................................................................... 22 2-4.1.2 Excluded IP ................................................................................................................................................ 25 2-4.1.3 Pool ............................................................................................................................................................. 27

2-4.2 Snooping .......................................................................................................................................... 29 2-4.3 Relay ................................................................................................................................................. 31

2-5 SECURITY .................................................................................................................................................... 33 2-5.1 Switch ............................................................................................................................................... 33

2-5.1.1 Users ........................................................................................................................................................... 33 2-5.1.2 Privilege Level ............................................................................................................................................ 35 2-5.1.3 Auth Method ............................................................................................................................................. 37 2-5.1.4 Access Management ................................................................................................................................ 39 2-5.1.5 SNMP ......................................................................................................................................................... 41

2-5.1.5.1 System ................................................................................................................................................ 41 2-5.1.5.2 Trap ..................................................................................................................................................... 43 2-5.1.5.3 Communities ..................................................................................................................................... 47 2-5.1.5.4 Users................................................................................................................................................... 49 2-5.1.5.5 Groups ............................................................................................................................................... 51 2-5.1.5.6 Views .................................................................................................................................................. 53 2-5.1.5.7 Access ................................................................................................................................................ 55 2-5.1.5.8 Trap Event Severity ........................................................................................................................... 57

2-5.1.6 RMON ........................................................................................................................................................ 59 2-5.1.6.1 Statistics ............................................................................................................................................. 59 2-5.1.6.2 History................................................................................................................................................ 61 2-5.1.6.3 Alarm .................................................................................................................................................. 63 2-5.1.6.4 Event................................................................................................................................................... 66

2-5.2 Network ............................................................................................................................................ 68 2-5.2.1 Limit Control .............................................................................................................................................. 68 2-5.2.2 NAS ............................................................................................................................................................. 71 2-5.2.3 ACL ............................................................................................................................................................. 80

2-5.2.3.1 Ports ................................................................................................................................................... 80 2-5.2.3.2 Rate Limiters ...................................................................................................................................... 82 2-5.2.3.3 Access Control List............................................................................................................................ 83

2-5.2.4 IP Source Guard ........................................................................................................................................ 95 2-5.2.4.1 Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 95 2-5.2.4.2 Static Table......................................................................................................................................... 97

2-5.2.5 ARP Inspection .......................................................................................................................................... 99

v User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

5 v

2-5.2.5.1 Port Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 99 2-5.2.5.2 VLAN Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 101 2-5.2.5.3 Static Table....................................................................................................................................... 103 2-5.2.5.4 Dynamic Table ................................................................................................................................. 105

2-5.3 AAA ................................................................................................................................................. 107 2-5.3.1 RADIUS ..................................................................................................................................................... 107 2-5.3.2 TACACS+ .................................................................................................................................................. 110

2-6 AGGREGATION ........................................................................................................................................... 112 2-6.1 Static ............................................................................................................................................... 112 2-6.2 LACP ............................................................................................................................................... 114

2-7 LOOP PROTECTION .................................................................................................................................... 116 2-8 SPANNING TREE ......................................................................................................................................... 118

2-8.1 Bridge Setting ................................................................................................................................. 118 2-8.2 MSTI Mapping ................................................................................................................................ 121 2-8.3 MSTI Priorities ................................................................................................................................ 123 2-8.4 CIST Ports ....................................................................................................................................... 125 2-8.5 MSTI Ports ...................................................................................................................................... 128

2-9 IPMC PROFILE .......................................................................................................................................... 130 2-9.1 Profile Table ................................................................................................................................... 130 2-9.2 Address Entry ................................................................................................................................. 133

2-10 MVR ...................................................................................................................................................... 135 2-11 IPMC ..................................................................................................................................................... 138

2-11.1 IGMP Snooping ............................................................................................................................ 138 2-11.1.1 Basic Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 138 2-11.1.2 VLAN Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 141 2-11.1.3 Port Filtering Profile .............................................................................................................................. 144

2-11.2 MLD Snooping ............................................................................................................................. 146 2-11.2.1 Basic Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 146 2-11.2.2 VLAN Configuration ............................................................................................................................. 149 2-11.2.3 Port Filtering Profile .............................................................................................................................. 152

2-12 LLDP ...................................................................................................................................................... 153 2-12.1 LLDP.............................................................................................................................................. 153 2-12.2 LLDP-MED .................................................................................................................................... 157

2-13 POE ........................................................................................................................................................ 164 2-13.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 165 2-13.2 Power Delay ................................................................................................................................. 168 2-13.3 Schedule Profile ........................................................................................................................... 169 2-13.4 Auto Checking ............................................................................................................................. 171 2-13.5 Chip Reset Schedule .................................................................................................................... 173

2-14 MAC TABLE ............................................................................................................................................ 174 2-15 VLANS ................................................................................................................................................... 177 2-16 PRIVATE VLANS ...................................................................................................................................... 181

2-16.1 Membership ................................................................................................................................. 181 2-16.2 Port Isolation ................................................................................................................................ 183

2-17 VCL ........................................................................................................................................................ 185 2-17.1 MAC-based VLAN ........................................................................................................................ 185 2-17.2 Protocol-based VLAN .................................................................................................................. 187

2-17.2.1 Protocol to Group ................................................................................................................................. 187 2-17.2.2 Group to VLAN...................................................................................................................................... 190

2-17.3 IP Subnet-based VLAN ................................................................................................................ 192 2-18 VOICE VLAN......................................................................................................................................... 194

2-18.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 194 2-18.2 OUI................................................................................................................................................ 198

2-19 QOS ....................................................................................................................................................... 200 2-19.1 Port Classification ....................................................................................................................... 200

vi User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

6 vi

2-19.2 Port Policing ................................................................................................................................. 202 2-19.3 Port Schedulers ............................................................................................................................ 204 2-19.4 Port Shaping ................................................................................................................................ 207 2-19.5 Port Tag Remarking..................................................................................................................... 210 2-19.6 Port DSCP..................................................................................................................................... 213 2-19.7 DSCP-Based QoS ......................................................................................................................... 215 2-19.8 DSCP Translation ......................................................................................................................... 217 2-19.9 DSCP Classification ..................................................................................................................... 219 2-19.10 QoS Control List......................................................................................................................... 220 2-19.11 Storm Control ............................................................................................................................ 224

2-20 MIRRORING ............................................................................................................................................ 226 2-21 UPNP ..................................................................................................................................................... 228 2-22 GVRP ..................................................................................................................................................... 230

2-22.1 Global Config ............................................................................................................................... 230 2-22.2 Port Config ................................................................................................................................... 232

2-23 SFLOW .................................................................................................................................................... 233 2-24 SMTP .................................................................................................................................................... 236

CHAPTER 3 MONITOR .................................................................................................................... 238

3-1 SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................................................... 238 3-1.1 Information .................................................................................................................................... 238 3-1.2 IP Status .......................................................................................................................................... 241 3-1.3 Log .................................................................................................................................................. 243 3-1.4 Detailed Log ................................................................................................................................... 244 3-1.5 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 246

3-2 GREEN ETHERNET ...................................................................................................................................... 248 3-2.1 Port Power Savings ........................................................................................................................ 248

3-3 PORTS ....................................................................................................................................................... 249 3-3.1 Traffic Overview ............................................................................................................................. 249 3-3.2 Qos Statistics .................................................................................................................................. 251 3-3.3 QCL Status ...................................................................................................................................... 252 3-3.4 Detailed Statistics .......................................................................................................................... 254 3-3.5 SFP Detail Info ............................................................................................................................... 257

3-4 DHCP ...................................................................................................................................................... 259 3-4.1 Server .............................................................................................................................................. 259

3-4.1.1 Statistics ................................................................................................................................................... 259 3-4.1.2 Binding ..................................................................................................................................................... 261 3-4.1.3 Declined IP ............................................................................................................................................... 263

3-4.2 Snooping Table .............................................................................................................................. 264 3-4.3 Relay Statistics ............................................................................................................................... 266 3-4.4 Detailed Statistics .......................................................................................................................... 268

3-5 SECURITY .................................................................................................................................................. 270 3-5.1 Access Management Statistics ...................................................................................................... 270 3-5.2 Network .......................................................................................................................................... 272

3-5.2.1 Port Security ............................................................................................................................................ 272 3-5.2.1.1 Switch ............................................................................................................................................... 272 3-5.2.1.2 Port ................................................................................................................................................... 274

3-5.2.2 NAS ........................................................................................................................................................... 276 3-5.2.2.1 Switch ............................................................................................................................................... 276 3-5.2.2.2 Port ................................................................................................................................................... 278

3-5.2.3 ACL Status ................................................................................................................................................ 281 3-5.2.4 ARP Inspection ........................................................................................................................................ 283 3-5.2.5 IP Source Guard ...................................................................................................................................... 285

3-5.3 AAA ................................................................................................................................................. 286 3-5.3.1 RADIUS Overview ................................................................................................................................... 286

vii User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

7 vii

3-5.3.2 RADIUS Details ........................................................................................................................................ 288 3-5.4 Switch ............................................................................................................................................. 290

3-5.4.1 RMON ...................................................................................................................................................... 290 3-5.4.1.1 Statistics ........................................................................................................................................... 290 3-5.4.1.2 History.............................................................................................................................................. 293 3-5.4.1.3 Alarm ................................................................................................................................................ 295 3-5.4.1.4 Event................................................................................................................................................. 297

3-6 LACP ....................................................................................................................................................... 299 3-6.1 System Status ................................................................................................................................. 299 3-6.2 Port Status ...................................................................................................................................... 301 3-6.3 Port Statistics ................................................................................................................................. 303

3-7 LOOP PROTECTION .................................................................................................................................... 304 3-8 SPANNING TREE ......................................................................................................................................... 306

3-8.1 Bridge Status .................................................................................................................................. 306 3-8.2 Port Status ...................................................................................................................................... 308 3-8.3 Port Statistics ................................................................................................................................. 309

3-9 MVR ........................................................................................................................................................ 311 3-9.1 Statistics .......................................................................................................................................... 311 3-9.2 MVR Channels Groups .................................................................................................................. 313 3-9.3 MVR SFM Information ................................................................................................................... 315

3-10 IPMC ..................................................................................................................................................... 317 3-10.1 IGMP Snooping ............................................................................................................................ 317

3-10.1.1 Status ...................................................................................................................................................... 317 3-10.1.2 Group Information ................................................................................................................................ 319 3-10.1.3 IPv4 SFM Information ........................................................................................................................... 321

3-10.2 MLD Snooping ............................................................................................................................. 323 3-10.2.1 Status ...................................................................................................................................................... 323 3-10.2.2 Group Information ................................................................................................................................ 325 3-10.2.3 IPv6 SFM Information ........................................................................................................................... 327

3-11 LLDP ...................................................................................................................................................... 329 3-11.1 Neighbour .................................................................................................................................... 329 3-11.2 LLDP-MED Neighbour ................................................................................................................. 331 3-11.3 PoE ................................................................................................................................................ 335 3-11.4 EEE ................................................................................................................................................ 337 3-11.5 Port Statistics ............................................................................................................................... 339

3-12 POE ........................................................................................................................................................ 341 3-13 MAC TABLE ............................................................................................................................................ 343 3-14 VLANS ................................................................................................................................................... 345

3-14.1 Membership ................................................................................................................................. 345 3-14.2 Port ............................................................................................................................................... 347

3-15 VCL ........................................................................................................................................................ 349 3-15.1 MAC-based VLAN ........................................................................................................................ 349 3-15.2 Protocol-based VLAN .................................................................................................................. 350

3-15.2.1 Protocol to Group ................................................................................................................................. 350 3-15.2.2 Group to VLAN...................................................................................................................................... 352 3-15.3 IP Subnet-based VLAN ............................................................................................................................ 353

3-16 SFLOW .................................................................................................................................................... 354

CHAPTER 4 DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................................................................. 356

4-1 PING ......................................................................................................................................................... 356 4-2 PING6 ....................................................................................................................................................... 358 4-3 CABLE DIAGNOSTICS .................................................................................................................................. 360 4-4 TRACEROUTE ............................................................................................................................................. 362

CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................... 364

viii User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

8 viii

5-1 RESTART DEVICE ........................................................................................................................................ 364 5-2 REBOOT SCHEDULE .................................................................................................................................... 366 5-3 FACTORY DEFAULTS .................................................................................................................................... 367 5-4 FIRMWARE................................................................................................................................................. 368

5-4.1 Firmware upgrade ......................................................................................................................... 368 5-4.2 Firmware Selection ........................................................................................................................ 370

5-5 CONFIGURATION........................................................................................................................................ 372 5-5.1 Save startup-config ....................................................................................................................... 372 5-5.2 Download ....................................................................................................................................... 373 5-5.3 Upload ............................................................................................................................................ 374 5-5.4 Activate ........................................................................................................................................... 375 5-5.5 Delete.............................................................................................................................................. 376

5-6 SERVER REPORT ......................................................................................................................................... 377

CHAPTER 6 SURVEILLANCE .......................................................................................................... 377

6-1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 377 6-2 MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................................................... 379 6-2.1 SURVEILLANCE MODE ............................................................................................................................. 379 6-2.2 DEVICE LIST ............................................................................................................................................ 380 6-3.2 CAMERA CONFIGURE .............................................................................................................................. 384

Config Export ........................................................................................................................................... 384 Config Import ........................................................................................................................................... 384

CHAPTER 7 SURVEILLANCE GRAPHICAL MONITORING ................................................... 387

7-1 Topology View ............................................................................................................................................ 387 7-2 Floor View..395

7-3 MAP VIEW ..................................................................................................................................................... 399

CHAPTER 8 SURVEILLANCE - MAINTENANCE ............................................................................ 401

8-1 FLOOR IMAGE ............................................................................................................................................ 401 8-2 DIAGNOSTICS ............................................................................................................................................ 402

ix User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

9 ix

Revision History

Release Date Revision

V1.00 2017/03/06 A1

V2.00 2018/01/20 A2

Introduction

Overview

VivoCam L2+ Managed PoE switch is a next-generation Ethernet Switch offering powerful L2

features, Layer 3 Static Route, better PoE functionality and usability that delivers the cost-effectively

business and transports Ethernet services via fiber or copper connections.

VivoCam L2+ Managed PoE switch delivers 10 or 24 (10M/100M/1G) RJ45 and PoE+ (Support

802.3at/af, and total up to 130W or 370W) ports and 2 Combo GbE RJ45/SFP ports. VivoCam L2+

Managed PoE switch also provides high HW performance and environment flexibility for SMBs and

Enterprises.

VivoCam L2+ Managed PoE switch is ideal to deliver management simplicity, optimum user

experience, and lower cost. The embedded Device Managed System is designed to be extremely

easy-to-use/manage/install IP Phone, IP Cam, or Wifi-AP for Enterprise Applications.

L2+ features provide better manageability, security, QoS, and performance.

Support IPv4/IPv6 dual stack management

Support SSH/SSL secured management

Support SNMP v1/v2c/v3

Support RMON groups 1,2,3,9

Support sFlow

Support IGMP v1/v2/v3 Snooping

Support MLD v1/v2 Snooping

Support RADIUS and TACACS+ authentication

Support IP Source Guard

Support DHCP Relay (Option 82)

Support DHCP Snooping

Support ACL and QCL for traffic filtering

Support 802.1d(STP), 802.1w(RSTP) and 802.1s(MSTP)

Support LACP and static link aggregation

Support Q-in-Q double tag VLAN

Support GVRP dynamic VLAN

Overview of this User Guide

Chapter 1 Operation of Web-based Management

Chapter 2 Configuration

Chapter 3 Monitor

Chapter 4 Diagnostics

Chapter 5 Maintenance

NOTE:

For users who use this switch in a surveillance application, you can go directly to Chapter 6 through Chapter 8 for information directly related to surveillance deployments.

Chapter 1 Operation of Web-based Management

IMPORTANT:

1. It is recommended to use IE10 or IE11 to open a web console with the PoE switch.

2. This PoE switch is specifically designed for surveillance applications. It comes with an integrated Surveillance interface for ease of configuration. The Surveillance interface is accessed through a tabbed menu, and the configuration changes made in its window have a higher priority than those in the Switch configuration menus.

3. You should save the configuration changes made on the Surveillance menus before leaving the

web page. Otherwise, your configuration changes will be lost. The save button is located on the

upper right corner of the screen.

This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the PoE L2 switch through the web user interface. With this facility, you can easily access and monitor through any one port of the switch all the status of the switch, including MIBs status, each port activity, Spanning tree status, port aggregation status, multicast traffic, VLAN and priority status, even illegal access record and so on.

Publication date: Nov., 2016

Revision A1

1

Initial

Configuration

This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the AW-GEV-107A-130

and AW-GEV-267A-370 through the web interface. With this facility, you can

easily access and monitor through any one port of the switch all the status of the

switch, including MIBs status, each port activity, Spanning tree status, port

aggregation status, multicast traffic, VLAN and priority status, even illegal access

record and so on.

The default values of the AW-GEV-107A-130 and AW-GEV-267A-370 are listed in the

table below:

IP Address DHCP client

Username admin

Password admin

You can use VIVOTEK's IW2 utility to locate the PoE switch. After the AW-GEV-107A-130 and

AW-GEV-267A-370 has been finished configuration the web interface, you can browse it. For instance, type

http://192.168.1.1 in the address row in a browser, it will show the following screen and ask you inputting

username and password in order to login and access authentication.

The default username is admin and password is admin. For the first time to use, please enter the default

username and password, and then click the button. The login process now is completed. In this login

menu, you have to input the complete username and password respectively, the AW-GEV-107A-130 and

AW-GEV-267A-370 will not give you a shortcut to username automatically. This looks inconvenient, but safer.

In the AW-GEV-107A-130 and AW-GEV-267A-370, allowed two or more users using administrators identity to

manage this switch, which administrator to do the last setting, it will be an available configuration to effect the

system.

NOTE:

When you login the Switch WEB/CLI to manager. You must first

type the Username of the admin. Password was blank, so when

you type after the end Username, please press enter.

Management page to enter WEB/CLI.

When you login AW-GEV-107A-130 and AW-GEV-267A-370 series

switch Web UI management, you can use both ipv4 ipv6 login to

manage

To optimize the display effect, we recommend you use Microsoft

IE 6.0 above, Netscape V7.1 above or Firefox V1.00 above and

have the resolution 1024x768. The switch supported neutral web

browser interface

You can find the PoE switch using VIVOTEKs IW2 utility. If network address conflicts occur, use this utility to locate the PoE switch.

6 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

6 6

NOTE:

The Switch default ip is DHCP client.

NOTE:

The PoE switch and all cameras attached must be configured in the same subnet. Otherwise, the Surveillance-related functions will not apply. You can let the PoE switch be a DHCP client (listening to a DHCP server for IP assignment), or enable its onboard DHCP server.

Figure 1: The login page

If you double-click on the entry found on the IW2 utility, an IE console will be opened. If you prefer using Firefox or Google Chrome, you can manually enter the IP address in your browsers URL field.

7 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

7 7

Chapter 2 Configuration

This chapter describes the entire basic configuration tasks which includes the System Information and

any manage of the Switch (e.g. Time, Account, IP, Syslog and NTP.)

2-1 System

You can identify the system by configuring the contact information, name, and location of the

switch.

2-1.1 Information

The switch systems contact information is provided here.

Web interface

To configure System Information in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, System and Information.

2. Write System Contact, System Name, System Location information in this page.

3. Click Apply

Figure 2-1.1: System Information

Parameter description:

System Contact :

The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node, together with

information on how to contact this person. The allowed string length is 0 to 128, and the

allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126.

System name :

8 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

8 8

An administratively assigned name for this managed node. By convention, this is the node's

fully-qualified domain name. A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet

(A-Za-z), digits (0-9), minus sign (-). No space characters are permitted as part of a name.

The first character must be an alpha character. And the first or last character must not be a

minus sign. The allowed string length is 0 to 128.

System Location :

The physical location of this node(e.g., telephone closet, 3rd floor). The allowed string

length is 0 to 128, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

7 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

7 7

2-1.2 IP

The IPv4 address for the switch could be obtained via DHCP Server for VLAN 1. To manually

configure an address, you need to change the switch's default settings to values that are

compatible with your network. You may also need to establish a default gateway between the

switch and management stations that exist on another network segment.

Configure the switch-managed IP information on this page

Configure IP basic settings, control IP interfaces and IP routes.

The maximum number of interfaces supported is 8 and the maximum number of routes is 32.

Web Interface

To configure an IP address in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, System and IP.

2. Click Add Interface then you can create new Interface on the switch.

3. Click Add Route then you can create new Route on the switch.

4. Click Apply.

Figure2-1.2: The IP configuration

Parameter description:

IP Configuration

Mode :

8 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

8 8

Configure whether the IP stack should act as a Host or a Router. In Host mode, IP traffic

between interfaces will not be routed. In Router mode traffic is routed between all

interfaces.

DNS Server :

This setting controls the DNS name resolution done by the switch. The following modes are

supported:

From any DHCP interfaces:

The first DNS server offered from a DHCP lease to a DHCP-enabled interface will be used.

No DNS server:

No DNS server will be used.

Configured:

Explicitly provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation.

From this DHCP interface

Specify from which DHCP-enabled interface a provided DNS server should be preferred.

DNS Proxy :

When DNS proxy is enabled, system will relay DNS requests to the currently configured

DNS server, and reply as a DNS resolver to the client devices on the network.

IP Interfaces

DHCP Per Port Mode :

Enable/Disable DHCP per port.

DHCP Per Port IP :

Define the IP range for DHCP per port.

Delete :

Select this option to delete an existing IP interface.

VLAN :

The VLAN associated with the IP interface. Only ports in this VLAN will be able to access the

IP interface. This field is only available for input when creating a new interface.

IPv4 DHCP Enabled :

Enable the DHCP client by checking this box. If this option is enabled, the system will

configure the IPv4 address and mask of the interface using the DHCP protocol. The DHCP

client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup.

IPv4 DHCP Fallback Timeout :

The number of seconds for trying to obtain a DHCP lease. After this period expires, a

configured IPv4 address will be used as IPv4 interface address. A value of zero disables the

fallback mechanism, such that DHCP will keep retrying until a valid lease is obtained. Legal

values are 0 to 4294967295 seconds.

IPv4 DHCP Current Lease :

For DHCP interfaces with an active lease, this column show the current interface address, as

provided by the DHCP server.

IPv4 Address :

The IPv4 address of the interface in dotted decimal notation.

If DHCP is enabled, this field is not used. The field may also be left blank if IPv4 operation

on the interface is not desired.

IPv4 Mask Length :

The IPv4 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length). Valid values are between 0 and 30

9 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

9 9

bits for a IPv4 address.

If DHCP is enabled, this field is not used. The field may also be left blank if IPv4 operation

on the interface is not desired.

IPv6 Address :

The IPv6 address of the interface. A IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight

fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For example,

fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7. The symbol :: is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand

way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can appear only once.

It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, ::192.1.2.34.

The field may be left blank if IPv6 operation on the interface is not desired.

IPv6 Mask Length :

The IPv6 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length). Valid values are between 1 and

128 bits for a IPv6 address.

The field may be left blank if IPv6 operation on the interface is not desired.

IP Routes

Delete :

Select this option to delete an existing IP route.

Network :

The destination IP network or host address of this route. Valid format is dotted decimal

notationor a valid IPv6 notation. A default route can use the value 0.0.0.0or IPv6 :: notation.

Mask Length :

The destination IP network or host mask, in number of bits (prefix length). It defines how

much of a network address that must match, in order to qualify for this route. Valid values

are between 0 and 32 bits respectively 128 for IPv6 routes. Only a default route will have a

mask length of 0 (as it will match anything).

Gateway :

The IP address of the IP gateway. Valid format is dotted decimal notationor a valid IPv6

notation. Gateway and Network must be of the same type.

Next Hop VLAN (Only for IPv6) :

The VLAN ID (VID) of the specific IPv6 interface associated with the gateway.

The given VID ranges from 1 to 4094 and will be effective only when the corresponding IPv6

interface is valid.

If the IPv6 gateway address is link-local, it must specify the next hop VLAN for the gateway.

If the IPv6 gateway address is not link-local, system ignores the next hop VLAN for the

gateway.

Buttons

Add Interface :

Click to add a new IP interface. A maximum of 8 interfaces is supported.

Add Route :

Click to add a new IP route. A maximum of 32 routes is supported.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

10 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

10 10

2-1.3 NTP

NTP is Network Time Protocol and is used to sync the network time based Greenwich Mean

Time (GMT). If use the NTP mode and select a built-in NTP time server or manually specify an

user-defined NTP server as well as Time Zone, the switch will sync the time in a short after

pressing button. Though it synchronizes the time automatically, NTP does not update

the time periodically without users processing.

Time Zone is an offset time off GMT. You have to select the time zone first and then perform

time sync via NTP because the switch will combine this time zone offset and updated NTP time

to come out the local time, otherwise, you will not able to get the correct time. The switch

supports configurable time zone from 12 to +13 step 1 hour.

Default Time zone: +8 Hrs.

Web Interface

To configure NTP in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, System and NTP.

2. Specify the Time parameter in manual parameters.

3. Click Apply.

Figure 2-1.3: The NTP configuration

Parameter description:

Automatic :

Indicates the Automatic mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: NTP servers available from the DHCP.

Disabled: NTP servers available from the config.

Server address via DHCP :

Specify a list of IP addresses indicating NTP servers available to the client.

Server 1 to 5 :

Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records

represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each

field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be

used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it

11 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

11 11

can only appear once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example,

'::192.1.2.34'.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Publication date: Nov., 2016

Revision A1

11

2-1.4 Time

The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via NTP. Manual setting

is simple and you just input Year, Month, Day, Hour and Minute within the valid value

range indicated in each item.

Web Interface

To configure Time in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, System and Time.

2. Specify the Time parameter.

3. Click Apply.

12 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

12 12

Figure 2-1.4: The time configuration

Parameter description:

Time Configuration

Clock Source :

There are two modes for configuring how the Clock Source from. Select "Use Local

Settings" : Clock Source from Local Time. Select "Use NTP Server" : Clock Source from NTP

Server.

System Date :

Show the current time of the system. The year of system date limits between 2011 and 2037.

Time Zone Configuration

Time Zone :

Lists various Time Zones worldwide. Select appropriate Time Zone from the drop down and

click Apply to set.

Acronym :

User can set the acronym of the time zone. This is a User configurable acronym to identify

the time zone. (Range: Up to 16 characters)

Daylight Saving Time Configuration

Daylight Saving Time :

This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below

13 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

13 13

for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration. Select 'Disable' to disable the Daylight Saving

Time configuration. Select 'Recurring' and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to

repeat the configuration every year. Select 'Non-Recurring' and configure the Daylight

Saving Time duration for single time configuration. (Default: Disabled).

Recurring Configuration

Start time settings :

Week - Select the starting week number.

Day - Select the starting day.

Month - Select the starting month.

Hours - Select the starting hour.

Minutes - Select the starting minute.

End time settings :

Week - Select the ending week number.

Day - Select the ending day.

Month - Select the ending month.

Hours - Select the ending hour.

Minutes - Select the ending minute.

Offset settings :

Offset - Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. (Range: 1 to 1440)

NOTE: The under Start Time Settings and End Time Settings was

displayed what you set on the Start Time Settings and End Time

Settings field information.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

14 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

14 14

2-1.5 Log

The log is a standard for logging program messages . It allows separation of the software that

generates messages from the system that stores them and the software that reports and

analyzes them. It can be used as well a generalized informational, analysis and debugging

messages. It is supported by a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms.

Web Interface

To configure log configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, System and log.

2. Specify the Server Address.

3. Evoke the Syslog to enable it.

4. Click Apply.

Figure2-1.5: The System Log configuration

Parameter description:

Server Mode :

Indicate the server mode operation. When the mode operation is enabled, the syslog

message will send out to syslog server. The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication

and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back

sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments.

The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist. Possible

modes are:

Enabled: Enable server mode operation.

Disabled: Disable server mode operation.

Server Address :

Indicates the IPv4 hosts address of syslog server. If the switch provide DNS feature, it also

can be a host name.

Server Port :

Indicates the service port of syslog server. The port range is 1-65535.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

15 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

15 15

2-2 Green Ethernet

2-2.1 Port Power Savings

EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is low or no traffic

utilization.

EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic. When a port gets data to be

transmitted all circuits are powered up. The time it takes to power up the circuits is named

wakeup time. The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds.

EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the

receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted. The

devices can exchange wakeup time information using the LLDP protocol.

EEE works for ports in auto-negotiation mode, where the port is negotiated to either 1G or 100

Mbit full duplex mode.

For ports that are not EEE-capable the corresponding EEE checkboxes are grayed out and thus

impossible to enable EEE for.

When a port is powered down for saving power, outgoing traffic is stored in a buffer until the

port is powered up again. Because there are some overhead in turning the port down and up,

more power can be saved if the traffic can be buffered up until a large burst of traffic can be

transmitted. Buffering traffic will give some latency in the traffic.

Web Interface

To configure a Port Power Saving Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Green Ethernet and Port Power Savings.

2. Evoke to enable or disable the ActiPHY, PerfectReach, EEE and EEE Urgent Queues.

3. Click Apply.

Figure 2-2.1: The Port Power Saving Configuration

16 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

16 16

Parameter description:

Optimize EEE for :

The switch can be set to optimize EEE for either best power saving or least traffic latency.

Port :

The switch port number of the logical port.

EEE :

Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port.

For maximizing power savings, the circuit isn't started at once transmit data is ready for a

port, but is instead queued until a burst of data is ready to be transmitted. This will give

some traffic latency.

If desired it is possible to minimize the latency for specific frames, by mapping the frames to

a specific queue (done with QOS), and then mark the queue as an urgent queue. When an

urgent queue gets data to be transmitted, the circuits will be powered up at once and the

latency will be reduced to the wakeup time.

EEE Urgent Queues :

Queues set will activate transmission of frames as soon as data is available. Otherwise the

queue will postpone transmission until a burst of frames can be transmitted.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

2-3 Ports Configuration

The section describes to configure the Port detail parameters of the switch. Others you could

using the Port configure to enable or disable the Port of the switch. Monitor the ports content

or status in the function.

2-3.1 Ports

This page displays current port configurations. Ports can also be configured here.

Web Interface

To configure a Current Port Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Ports Configuration and Ports.

2. Specify the Speed Configured, Flow Control, Maximum Frame size.

3. Click Apply.

Figure 2-3.1: The Port Configuration

Parameter description:

Port :

This is the logical port number for this row.

Link :

The current link state is displayed graphically. Green indicates the link is up and red that it is

down.

Current Link Speed :

19 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

19 19

Provides the current link speed of the port.

Configured Link Speed :

Selects any available link speed for the given switch port. Only speeds supported by the

specific port is shown. Possible speeds are:

Disabled - Disables the switch port operation.

Auto - Port auto negotiating speed with the link partner and selects the highest speed that

is compatible with the link partner.

10Mbps HDX - Forces the cu port in 10Mbps half-duplex mode.

10Mbps FDX - Forces the cu port in 10Mbps full duplex mode.

100Mbps HDX - Forces the cu port in 100Mbps half-duplex mode.

100Mbps FDX - Forces the cu port in 100Mbps full duplex mode.

1Gbps FDX - Forces the port in 1Gbps full duplex

2.5Gbps FDX - Forces the Serdes port in 2.5Gbps full duplex mode.

SFP_Auto_AMS - Automatically determines the speed of the SFP.

NOTE: There is no standardized way to do SFP auto detect, so here

it is done by reading the SFP rom. Due to the missing standardized

way of doing SFP auto detect some SFPs might not be detectable. The

port is set in AMS mode. Cu port is set in Auto mode.

100-FX - SFP port in 100-FX speed. Cu port disabled.

100-FX_AMS - Port in AMS mode. SFP port in 100-FX speed. Cu port

in Auto mode.

1000-X - SFP port in 1000-X speed. Cu port disabled.

1000-X_AMS - Port in AMS mode. SFP port in 1000-X speed. Cu port

in Auto mode. Ports in AMS mode with 1000-X speed has Cu port

preferred. Ports in AMS mode with 100-FX speed has fiber port

preferred.

Flow Control :

When Auto Speed is selected on a port, this section indicates the flow control capability that

is advertised to the link partner. When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used.

The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed, and the

Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted. The Rx and

Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation.

Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the setting for

Configured Link Speed.

Maximum Frame Size :

Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including FCS.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

20 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

20 20

Upper left icon (Refresh) :

Click to refresh the page. Any changes made locally will be undone.

21 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

21 21

2-3.2 Ports Description

The section describes to configure the Ports alias or any descriptions for the Port Identity. It

provides user to write down an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version

identification for the systems hardware type, software version, and networking application

Web Interface

To configure a Port Description in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Port Configuration and Port Description.

2. Specify the detail Port alias or description an alphanumeric string describing the full name

and version identification for the systems hardware type, software version, and networking

application.

3. Click Apply.

Figure 2-3.2: The Port Configuration

Parameter description:

Port :

This is the logical port number for this row.

Description :

Enter up to 47 characters to be descriptive name for identifies this port.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

22 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

22 22

2-4 DHCP

The section describes to configure the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch. The DHCP

Snooping can prevent attackers from adding their own DHCP servers to the network.

2-4.1 Server

2-4.1.1 Mode

This page configures global mode and VLAN mode to enable/disable DHCP server per system

and per VLAN.

Web Interface

To configure DHCP server mode in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, DHCP, Server and Mode.

2. Select Enabled in the Global Mode of DHCP Server Mode Configuration.

3. Add Vlan range.

4. Click Apply.

23 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

23 23

Figure 2-4.1.1: The DHCP server Mode

Parameter description:

Mode :

Configure the operation mode per system. Possible modes are:

Enable: Enable DHCP server per system.

Disable: Disable DHCP server pre system.

VLAN Range :

Indicate the VLAN range in which DHCP server is enabled or disabled. The first VLAN ID

must be smaller than or equal to the second VLAN ID. BUT, if the VLAN range contains only

1 VLAN ID, then you can just input it into either one of the first and second VLAN ID or both.

On the other hand, if you want to disable existed VLAN range, then you can follow the steps.

1. press ADD VLAN Range to add a new VLAN range.

2. Input the VLAN range that you want to disable.

3. Choose Mode to be disabled.

4. Press Apply to apply the change.

Then, you will see the disabled VLAN range is removed from the DHCP Server mode

configuration page.

Mode :

Indicate the operation mode per VLAN. Possible modes are:

Enable: Enable DHCP server per VLAN.

Disable: Disable DHCP server pre VLAN.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add VLAN Range :

Click to add a new VLAN range.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

24 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

24 24

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

25 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

25 25

2-4.1.2 Excluded IP

This page configures excluded IP addresses. DHCP server will not allocate these excluded IP

addresses to DHCP client.

Web Interface

To configure DHCP server excluded IP in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, DHCP, Server and Excluded IP.

2. Click Add IP Range then you can create new IP Range on the switch.

3. Click Apply.

Figure 2-4.1.2: The DHCP server excluded IP

Parameter description:

IP Range :

Define the IP range to be excluded IP addresses. The first excluded IP must be smaller than or equal to

the second excluded IP. BUT, if the IP range contains only 1 excluded IP, then you can just input it to

either one of the first and second excluded IP or both.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add IP Range :

Click to add a new excluded IP range.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

26 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

26 26

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

27 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

27 27

2-4.1.3 Pool

This page manages DHCP pools. According to the DHCP pool, DHCP server will allocate IP

address and deliver configuration parameters to DHCP client.

Web Interface

To configure DHCP server pool in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, DHCP, Server and Pool.

2. Click Add New Pool then you can create new Pool on the switch.

3. Click Apply.

Figure 2-4.1.3: The DHCP server pool

Parameter description:

Pool Setting

Add or delete pools.

Adding a pool and giving a name is to create a new pool with "default" configuration. If you

want to configure all settings including type, IP subnet mask and lease time, you can click

the pool name to go into the configuration page.

Name :

Configure the pool name that accepts all printable characters, except white space. If you want to

configure the detail settings, you can click the pool name to go into the configuration page.

Type :

28 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

28 28

Display which type of the pool is.

Network: the pool defines a pool of IP addresses to service more than one DHCP client.

Host: the pool services for a specific DHCP client identified by client identifier or hardware address.

If "-" is displayed, it means not defined.

IP :

Display network number of the DHCP address pool.

If "-" is displayed, it means not defined.

Subnet Mask :

Display subnet mask of the DHCP address pool.

If "-" is displayed, it means not defined.

Lease Time :

Display lease time of the pool.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Pool :

Click to add a new DHCP pool.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

29 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

29 29

2-4.2 Snooping

DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it

tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between

the DHCP client and server.

The section describes to configure the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch. The DHCP

Snooping can prevent attackers from adding their own DHCP servers to the network.

Web Interface

To configure DHCP snooping in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, DHCP and Snooping.

2. Select Enabled in the Mode of DHCP Snooping Configuration.

3. Select Trusted of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-4.2: The DHCP Snooping Configuration

Parameter description:

Snooping Mode :

Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation. When DHCP snooping mode operation is

enabled, the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply

packets from trusted ports.

Disabled: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.

Port Mode Configuration

Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode. Possible port modes are:

30 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

30 30

Trusted: Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages.

Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCP messages.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

31 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

31 31

2-4.3 Relay

A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and

the server when they are not in the same subnet domain. It stores the incoming interface IP

address in the GIADDR field of the DHCP packet. The DHCP server can use the value of GIADDR

field to determine the assigned subnet. For such condition, please make sure the switch

configuration of VLAN interface IP address and PVID(Port VLAN ID) correctly.

Web Interface

To configure DHCP Relay in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, DHCP and Relay

2. Specify the Relay Mode, Relay server, Relay Information Mode, Relay Information police.

3. Click Apply.

Figure 2-4.3: The DHCP Relay Configuration

Parameter description:

Relay Mode :

Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation.

Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable DHCP relay mode operation. When DHCP relay mode operation is enabled,

the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when

they are not in the same subnet domain. And the DHCP broadcast message won't be

flooded for security considerations.

Disabled: Disable DHCP relay mode operation.

Relay Server :

Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address.

Relay Information Mode :

Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation. The option 82 circuit ID

format as "[vlan_id][module_id][port_no]". The first four characters represent the VLAN ID,

the fifth and sixth characters are the module ID(in standalone device it always equal 0, in

stackable device it means switch ID), and the last two characters are the port number. For

example, "00030108" means the DHCP message receive form VLAN ID 3, switch ID 1, port

No 8. And the option 82 remote ID value is equal the switch MAC address.

32 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

32 32

Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable DHCP relay information mode operation. When DHCP relay information

mode operation is enabled, the agent inserts specific information (option 82) into a DHCP

message when forwarding to DHCP server and removes it from a DHCP message when

transferring to DHCP client. It only works when DHCP relay operation mode is enabled.

Disabled: Disable DHCP relay information mode operation.

Relay Information Policy :

Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy. When DHCP relay information mode

operation is enabled, if the agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay

agent information it will enforce the policy. The 'Replace' policy is invalid when relay

information mode is disabled. Possible policies are:

Replace: Replace the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains

it is received.

Keep: Keep the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is

received.

Drop: Drop the package when a DHCP message that already contains relay information is

received.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

33 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

33 33

2-5 Security

This section shows you to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch. You can use the

Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses.

2-5.1 Switch

2-5.1.1 Users

This page provides an overview of the current users. Currently the only way to login as another

user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser

Web Interface

To configure User in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch and Users.

2. Click Add new user

3. Specify the User Name parameter.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.1.1: The Users configuration

34 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

34 34

Parameter description:

User Name :

The name identifying the user. This is also a link to Add/Edit User.

Password :

To type the password. The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the

ASCII characters from 32 to 126.

Password (again) :

To type the password again. You must type the same password again in the field.

Privilege Level :

The privilege level of the user. The allowed range is 1 to 15. If the privilege level value is 15, it

can access all groups, i.e. that is granted the fully control of the device. But others value

need to refer to each group privilege level. User's privilege should be same or greater than

the group privilege level to have the access of that group. By default setting, most groups

privilege level 5 has the read-only access and privilege level 10 has the read-write access.

And the system maintenance (software upload, factory defaults and etc.) need user privilege

level 15. Generally, the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account, privilege

level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Cancel :

Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users.

Delete User :

Delete the current user. This button is not available for new configurations (Add new user)

35 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

35 35

2-5.1.2 Privilege Level

This page provides an overview of the privilege levels. The switch provides user set Account,

Aggregation, Diagnostics, EEE, GARP, GVRP,IP, IPMC Snooping LACP LLDP LLDP MED MAC

Table MRP MVR MVRP Maintenance Mirroring Ports Private VLANs QoS SMTP SNMP Security

Spanning Tree System Trap Event VCL VLANs Voice VLAN Privilege Levels from 1 to 15 .

Web Interface

To configure Privilege Level in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch and Privilege Level.

2. Specify the Privilege parameter.

3. Click Apply.

Figure2-5.1.2: The Privilege Level configuration

Parameter description:

Group Name :

The name identifying the privilege group. In most cases, a privilege level group consists of a

single module (e.g. LACP, RSTP or QoS), but a few of them contains more than one. The

following description defines these privilege level groups in details:

System: Contact, Name, Location, Timezone, Daylight Saving Time, Log.

Security: Authentication, System Access Management, Port (contains Dot1x port, MAC

based and the MAC Address Limit), ACL, HTTPS, SSH, ARP Inspection, IP source guard.

36 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

36 36

IP: Everything except 'ping'.

Port: Everything except 'VeriPHY'.

Diagnostics: 'ping' and 'VeriPHY'.

Maintenance: CLI- System Reboot, System Restore Default, System Password, Configuration

Save, Configuration Load and Firmware Load. Web- Users, Privilege Levels and everything in

Maintenance.

Debug: Only present in CLI.

Privilege Levels :

Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups: configuration

read-only, configuration/execute read-write, status/statistics read-only, and status/statistics

read-write (e.g. for clearing of statistics). User Privilege should be same or greater than the

authorization Privilege level to have the access to that group.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

37 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

37 37

2-5.1.3 Auth Method

This page shows how to configure a user with authenticated when he logs into the switch via

one of the management client interfaces.

Web Interface

To configure an Authentication Method Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch and Auth Method.

2. Specify the Client (console, telent, ssh, http, https) which you want to monitor.

3. Specify the Authentication Method (none,local, radius, tacacs+)

4. Specify service port.

5. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.1.3: The Authentication Method Configuration

Parameter description:

Client :

The management client for which the configuration below applies.

Authentication Method :

Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values:

none : authentication is disabled and login is not possible.

local : use the local user database on the switch for authentication.

radius : use a remote RADIUS server for authentication.

tacacs+ : use a remote TACACS+ server for authentication.

Methods that involves remote servers are timed out if the remote servers are offline. In this

case the next method is tried. Each method is tried from left to right and continues until a

method either approves or rejects a user. If a remote server is used for primary

authentication it is recommended to configure secondary authentication as 'local'. This will

enable the management client to login via the local user database if none of the configured

authentication servers are alive.

Service Port :

The TCP port for each client service. The valid port number is 1 ~ 65534.

38 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

38 38

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

39 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

39 39

2-5.1.4 Access Management

This section shows you to configure access management table of the Switch including

HTTP/HTTPS, SNMP, and TELNET/SSH. You can manage the Switch over an Ethernet LAN, or

over the Internet.

Web Interface

To configure an Access Management Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch and Access Management.

2. Select Enabled in the Mode of Access Management Configuration.

3. Click Add new entry.

4. Specify the Start IP Address, End IP Address.

5. Checked Access Management method (HTTP/HTTPS, SNMP, and TELNET/SSH) in the entry.

6. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.1.4: The Access Management Configuration

Parameter description:

Mode :

Indicates the access management mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable access management mode operation.

Disabled: Disable access management mode operation.

VLAN ID :

Indicates the VLAN ID for the access management entry.

Start IP address :

40 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

40 40

Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry.

End IP address :

Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry.

HTTP/HTTPS :

Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP/HTTPS interface if the host IP

address matches the IP address range provided in the entry.

SNMP :

Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP interface if the host IP address

matches the IP address range provided in the entry.

TELNET/SSH :

Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET/SSH interface if the host IP

address matches the IP address range provided in the entry.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new access management entry.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

41 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

41 41

2-5.1.5 SNMP

Any Network Management System (NMS) running the Simple Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) can manage the Managed devices equipped with SNMP agent, provided that the

Management Information Base (MIB) is installed correctly on the managed devices. The SNMP

is a protocol that is used to govern the transfer of information between SNMP manager and

agent and traverses the Object Identity (OID) of the management Information Base (MIB),

described in the form of SMI syntax. SNMP agent is running on the switch to response the

request issued by SNMP manager.

Basically, it is passive except issuing the trap information. The switch supports a switch to turn

on or off the SNMP agent. If you set the field SNMP Enable, SNMP agent will be started up.

All supported MIB OIDs, including RMON MIB, can be accessed via SNMP manager. If the field

SNMP is set Disable, SNMP agent will be de-activated, the related Community Name, Trap

Host IP Address, Trap and all MIB counters will be ignored.

2-5.1.5.1 System

This section describes how to configure SNMP System on the switch. This function is used to

configure SNMP settings, community name, trap host and public traps as well as the throttle

of SNMP. A SNMP manager must pass the authentication by identifying both community

names, then it can access the MIB information of the target device. So, both parties must have

the same community name. Once completing the setting, click button, the setting

takes effect.

Web Interface

To configure the configure SNMP System in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, SNMP and System.

2. Evoke SNMP State to enable or disable the SNMP function.

3. Specify the Engine ID

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.1.5.1: The SNMP System Configuration

42 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

42 42

Parameter description:

Mode :

Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP mode operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.

Version :

Indicates the SNMP supported version. Possible versions are:

SNMP v1: Set SNMP supported version 1.

SNMP v2c: Set SNMP supported version 2c.

SNMP v3: Set SNMP supported version 3.

Read Community :

Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent. The allowed

string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If SNMP version is

SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table. It

provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community

string. In addition to community string, a particular range of source addresses can be used

to restrict source subnet.

Write Community :

Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent. The allowed

string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If SNMP version is

SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table. It

provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community

string. In addition to community string, a particular range of source addresses can be used

to restrict source subnet.

Engine ID

Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID. The string must contain an even number(in hexadecimal

format) with number of digits between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.

Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

43 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

43 43

2-5.1.5.2 Trap

Configure SNMP trap on this page.

Web Interface

To configure the configure SNMP Trap Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, SNMP and Trap.

2. Click Add New Entry then you can create new SNMP Trap on the switch.

3. Click Apply

Figure 2-5.1.5.2: The SNMP Trap Configuration

Parameter description:

Global Settings

Configure SNMP trap on this page.

44 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

44 44

Mode :

Indicates the trap mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.

Trap Destination Configurations

Configure trap destinations on this page.

Name :

Indicates the trap Configuration's name. Indicates the trap destination's name.

Enable :

Indicates the trap destination mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.

Version :

Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:

SNMPv1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.

SNMPv2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.

SNMPv3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.

Destination Address :

Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allow a valid IP address in dotted decimal

notation ('x.y.z.w').

And it also allow a valid hostname. A valid hostname is a string drawn from the alphabet

(A-Za-z), digits (0-9), dot (.), dash (-). Spaces are not allowed, the first character must be an

alpha character, and the first and last characters must not be a dot or a dash.

Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records

represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each

field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be

used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it

can appear only once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example,

'::192.1.2.34'.

Destination port :

Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this

port, the port range is 1~65535.

SNMP Trap Detailed Configuration

Configure SNMP trap on this page.

Trap Config Name :

Indicates which trap Configuration's name for configuring. The allowed string length is 1 to

32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Trap Mode :

Indicates the trap mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.

Trap Mode :

45 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

45 45

Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP mode operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.

Trap Version :

Indicates the SNMP supported version. Possible versions are:

SNMP v1: Set SNMP supported version 1.

SNMP v2c: Set SNMP supported version 2c.

SNMP v3: Set SNMP supported version 3.

Trap Community :

Indicates the community access string when sending SNMP trap packet. The allowed string

length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Trap Destination Address :

Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allow a valid IP address in dotted decimal

notation ('x.y.z.w').

And it also allow a valid hostname. A valid hostname is a string drawn from the alphabet

(A-Za-z), digits (0-9), dot (.), dash (-). Spaces are not allowed, the first character must be an

alpha character, and the first and last characters must not be a dot or a dash.

Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records

represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each

field (:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be

used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it

can appear only once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example,

'::192.1.2.34'.

Trap Destination port :

Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this

port, the port range is 1~65535.

Trap Inform Mode :

Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation.

Trap Inform Timeout (seconds) :

Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout. The allowed range is 0 to 2147.

Trap Inform Retry Times :

Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times. The allowed range is 0 to 255.

Trap Probe Security Engine ID :

Indicates the SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation. Possible values are:

Enabled: Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.

Disabled: Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.

Trap Security Engine ID :

Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID. SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for

authentication and privacy. A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed. When

"Trap Probe Security Engine ID" is enabled, the ID will be probed automatically. Otherwise,

the ID specified in this field is used. The string must contain an even number(in hexadecimal

format) with number of digits between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.

Trap Security Name :

46 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

46 46

Indicates the SNMP trap security name. SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for

authentication and privacy. A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are

enabled.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new user.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

47 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

47 47

2-5.1.5.3Communities

The function is used to configure SNMPv3 communities. The Community and UserName is

unique. To create a new community account, please check button,

and enter the account information then check . Max Group Number: 4.

Web Interface

To configure the SNMP Communities in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, SNMP and Communities.

2. Click Add new Entry.

3. Specify the SNMP community parameters.

4. Click Apply.

5. If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset.

Figure 2-5.1.5.3: The SNMPv1/v2 Communities Security Configuration

Parameter description:

Community :

Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent. The allowed

string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126. The

community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c

community string.

Source IP :

Indicates the SNMP access source address. A particular range of source addresses can be

used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask.

48 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

48 48

Source Mask :

Indicates the SNMP access source address mask

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new entry.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

49 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

49 49

2-5.1.5.4 Users

The function is used to configure SNMPv3 user. The Entry index key is UserName. To create a

new UserName account, please check button, and enter the user

information then check . Max Group Number: 10.

Web Interface

To configure the SNMP Users in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, SNMP and Users.

2. Click Add new Entry.

3. Specify the Privilege parameter.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.1.5.4: The SNMP Users Configuration

Parameter description:

Engine ID :

An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to. The string must

contain an even number (in hexadecimal format) with number of digits between 10 and 64,

but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed. The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User-based

Security Model (USM) for message security and the View-based Access Control Model

(VACM) for access control. For the USM entry, the usmUserEngineID and usmUserName are

the entry's keys. In a simple agent, usmUserEngineID is always that agent's own

snmpEngineID value. The value can also take the value of the snmpEngineID of a remote

SNMP engine with which this user can communicate. In other words, if user engine ID equal

system engine ID then it is local user; otherwise it's remote user.

50 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

50 50

User Name :

A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string

length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Security Level :

Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:

NoAuth, NoPriv: No authentication and no privacy.

Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and no privacy.

Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.

The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means it must first

be ensured that the value is set correctly.

Authentication Protocol :

Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible

authentication protocols are:

None: No authentication protocol.

MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol.

SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol.

The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means must first

ensure that the value is set correctly.

Authentication Password :

A string identifying the authentication password phrase. For MD5 authentication protocol,

the allowed string length is 8 to 32. For SHA authentication protocol, the allowed string

length is 8 to 40. The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Privacy Protocol :

Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible privacy protocols

are:

None: No privacy protocol.

DES: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol.

Privacy Password :

A string identifying the privacy password phrase. The allowed string length is 8 to 32, and

the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new entry.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

51 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

51 51

2-5.1.5.5 Groups

The function is used to configure SNMPv3 group. The Entry index key are Security Model and

Security Name. To create a new group account, please check button, and

enter the group information then check . Max Group Number: v1: 2, v2: 2, v3:10.

Web Interface

To configure the SNMP Groups in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, SNMP and Groups.

2. Click Add new Entry.

3. Specify the Privilege parameter.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.1.5.5: The SNMP Groups Configuration

Parameter description:

Security Model :

52 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

52 52

Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:

v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.

v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.

usm: User-based Security Model (USM).

Security Name :

A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string

length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Group Name :

A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string

length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new entry.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

53 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

53 53

2-5.1.5.6 Views

The function is used to configure SNMPv3 view. The Entry index keys are OID Subtree and

View Name. To create a new view account, please check button, and enter

the view information then check . Max Group Number: 28.

Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page. The entry index keys are View Name and OID

Subtree.

Web Interface

To configure the SNMP views in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, SNMP and Views.

2. Click Add New Entry.

3. Specify the SNMP View parameters.

4. Click Apply.

5. If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset.

Figure 2-5.1.5.6: The SNMP Views Configuration

Parameter description:

View Name :

A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string

length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

View Type :

Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Possible view types are:

Included: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included.

Excluded: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded.

54 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

54 54

In general, if a view entry's view type is 'excluded', there should be another view entry

existing with view type as 'included' and it's OID subtree should overstep the 'excluded'

view entry.

OID Subtree :

The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view. The allowed OID length

is 1 to 128. The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk(*).

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new entry.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

55 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

55 55

2-5.1.5.7 Access

The function is used to configure SNMPv3 accesses. The Entry index key are Group Name,

Security Model and Security level. To create a new access account, please check

access> button, and enter the access information then check . Max Group Number : 14

Web Interface

To configure the SNMP Access in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, SNMP and Accesses.

2. Click Add new Access.

3. Specify the SNMP Access parameters.

4. Click Apply.

5. If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset.

Figure 2-5.1.5.7: The SNMP Accesses Configuration

Parameter description:

Group Name :

A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string

length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

Security Model :

Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:

Any: Any security model accepted(v1|v2c|usm).

56 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

56 56

v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.

v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.

usm: User-based Security Model (USM).

Security Level :

Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:

NoAuth, NoPriv: No authentication and no privacy.

Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and no privacy.

Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.

Read View Name :

The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the

current values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII

characters from 33 to 126.

Write View Name :

The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially

set new values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII

characters from 33 to 126.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new entry.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

57 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

57 57

2-5.1.5.8 Trap Event Severity

This page displays current trap event severity configurations. Trap event severity can also be

configured here.

Web Interface

To configure the Trap Event Severity in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, SNMP and Trap Event Severity.

2. Scroll to select the Group name and Severity Level

3. Click the Apply to save the setting

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values

Figure 2-5.1.5.8: The Trap Event Severity Configuration

Parameter description:

Group Name :

The name identifying the severity group.

Severity Level :

Every group has an severity level. The following level types are supported:

<0> Emergency: System is unusable.

<1> Alert: Action must be taken immediately.

<2> Critical: Critical conditions.

<3> Error: Error conditions.

<4> Warning: Warning conditions.

<5> Notice: Normal but significant conditions.

<6> Information: Information messages.

<7> Debug: Debug-level messages.

Syslog :

58 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

58 58

Enable - Select this Group Name in Syslog.

Trap :

Enable - Select this Group Name in Trap.

SMTP :

Enable - Select this Group Name in SMTP.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

59 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

59 59

2-5.1.6 RMON

An RMON implementation typically operates in a client/server model. Monitoring devices

contain RMON software agents that collect information and analyze packets. These probes act

as servers and the Network Management applications that communicate with them act as

clients.

2-5.1.6.1 Statistics

Configure RMON Statistics table on this page. The entry index key is ID.

Web Interface

To configure the RMON configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, RMON and Statistics.

2. Click Add New Entry.

3. Specify the ID parameters.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.1.6.1: The RMON Statistics Configuration

Parameter description:

These parameters are displayed on the RMON Statistics Configuration page:

ID :

Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

Data Source :

Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored. If in stacking switch, the value must add

1000*(switch ID-1), for example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is 2005

Buttons

60 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

60 60

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new entry.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

61 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

61 61

2-5.1.6.2 History

Configure RMON History table on this page. The entry index key is ID.

Web Interface

the RMON History in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, RMON and History.

2. Click Add New Entry.

3. Specify the ID parameters.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.1.6.2: The RMON History Configuration

Parameter description:

These parameters are displayed on the RMON History Configuration page:

ID :

Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

Data Source :

Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored. If in stacking switch, the value must add

1000*(switch ID-1), for example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is 2005

Interval :

Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data. The range is from 1

to 3600, default value is 1800 seconds.

Buckets :

Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON.

62 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

62 62

The range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 50.

Buckets Granted :

The number of data shall be saved in the RMON.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new entry.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

63 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

63 63

2-5.1.6.3 Alarm

Configure RMON Alarm table on this page. The entry index key is ID.

Web Interface

To display the configure RMON Alarm in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, RMON and Alarm.

2. Click Add New Entry.

3. Specify the ID parameters.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.1.6.3: The RMON Alarm Configuration

Parameter description:

These parameters are displayed on the RMON Alarm Configuration page:

ID :

Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

Interval :

Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold.

The range is from 1 to 2^31-1.

Variable :

Indicates the particular variable to be sampled, the possible variables are:

InOctets:

The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.

InUcastPkts:

The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

InNUcastPkts:

The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

InDiscards:

64 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

64 64

The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal.

InErrors:

The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being

deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

InUnknownProtos:

the number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of the unknown or

un-support protocol.

OutOctets:

The number of octets transmitted out of the interface , including framing characters.

OutUcastPkts:

The number of uni-cast packets that request to transmit.

OutNUcastPkts:

The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets that request to transmit.

OutDiscards:

The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the packets is normal.

OutErrors:

The The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.

OutQLen:

The length of the output packet queue (in packets).

Sample Type :

The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared

against the thresholds, possible sample types are:

Absolute: Get the sample directly.

Delta: Calculate the difference between samples (default).

Value :

The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.

Startup Alarm :

The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared

against the thresholds, possible sample types are:

RisingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold.

FallingTrigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold.

RisingOrFallingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less

than the falling threshold (default).

Rising Threshold :

Rising threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647).

Rising Index :

Rising event index (1-65535).

Falling Threshold :

Falling threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647)

Falling Index :

Falling event index (1-65535).

Buttons

65 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

65 65

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new entry.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

66 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

66 66

2-5.1.6.4 Event

Configure RMON Event table on this page. The entry index key is ID.

Web Interface

To display the configure RMON Event in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Switch, RMON and Event.

2. Click Add New Entry.

3. Specify the ID parameters.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.1.6.4: The RMON Event Configuration

Parameter description:

These parameters are displayed on the RMON History Configuration page:

ID :

Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

Desc :

Indicates this event, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string.

Type :

Indicates the notification of the event, the possible types are:

None: No SNMP log is created, no SNMP trap is sent.

Log: Create SNMP log entry when the event is triggered.

Snmp trap: Send SNMP trap when the event is triggered.

Log and trap: Create SNMP log entry and sent SNMP trap when the event is triggered.

Community :

Specify the community when trap is sent, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is

"public".

67 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

67 67

Event Last Time :

Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an event.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new entry.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

68 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

68 68

2-5.2 Network

2-5.2.1 Limit Control

This section shows you to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch. You can use the

Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses.

Web Interface

To configure a System Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface:

1. Select Enabled in the Mode of System Configuration.

2. Checked Aging Enabled.

3. Set Aging Period (Default is 3600 seconds).

To configure a Port Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface:

1. Select Enabled in the Mode of Port Configuration.

2. Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses in the Limit of Port Configuration.

3. Set Action (Trap, Shutdown, Trap & Shutdown)

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.2.1: The Port Security Limit Control Configuration

Parameter description:

System Configuration

Mode :

Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled,

69 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

69 69

other modules may still use the underlying functionality, but limit checks and corresponding

actions are disabled.

Aging Enabled :

If checked, secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period.

Aging Period :

If Aging Enabled is checked, then the aging period is controlled with this input. If other

modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses, they may have

other requirements to the aging period. The underlying port security will use the shorter

requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality.

The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10,000,000 seconds.

To understand why aging may be desired, consider the following scenario: Suppose an

end-host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub, which in turn is connected to a port on

this switch on which Limit Control is enabled. The end-host will be allowed to forward if the

limit is not exceeded. Now suppose that the end-host logs off or powers down. If it wasn't

for aging, the end-host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to

forward. To overcome this situation, enable aging. With aging enabled, a timer is started

once the end-host gets secured. When the timer expires, the switch starts looking for frames

from the end-host, and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period, the

end-host is assumed to be disconnected, and the corresponding resources are freed on the

switch.

Port Configuration

The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns, which

are:

Port :

The port number to which the configuration below applies.

Mode :

Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port. Both this and the Global Mode must

be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect. Notice that other modules may still use

the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port.

Limit :

The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port. This number

cannot exceed 1024. If the limit is exceeded, the corresponding action is taken.

The switch is "born" with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw

whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security-enabled port. Since all ports draw

from the same pool, it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted, if the

remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses.

Action :

If Limit is reached, the switch can take one of the following actions:

None: Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port, but take no further action.

Trap: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, send an SNMP trap. If Aging is

disabled, only one SNMP trap will be sent, but with Aging enabled, new SNMP traps will be

sent every time the limit gets exceeded.

Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, shut down the port. This implies

that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port, and no new address will be

learned. Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port (by

disconnecting the cable), the port will remain shut down. There are three ways to re-open

70 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

70 70

the port:

1) Boot the switch,

2) Disable and re-enable Limit Control on the port or the switch,

3) Click the Reopen button.

Trap & Shutdown: If Limit + 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port, both the "Trap" and the

"Shutdown" actions described above will be taken.

State :

This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control's point of

view. The state takes one of four values:

Disabled: Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port.

Ready: The limit is not yet reached. This can be shown for all actions.

Limit Reached: Indicates that the limit is reached on this port. This state can only be shown

if Action is set to none or Trap.

Shutdown: Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module. This state can

only be shown if Action is set to shut down or Trap & Shutdown.

Re-open Button :

If a port is shut down by this module, you may reopen it by clicking this button, which will

only be enabled if this is the case. For other methods, refer to shut down in the Action

section.

NOTE: That clicking the reopen button causes the page to be

refreshed, so non-committed changes will be lost

Buttons

Refresh :

You can click them for refresh the Port Security information by manual.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

71 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

71 71

2-5.2.2 NAS

The section describes to configure the NAS parameters of the switch. The NAS server can be

employed to connect users to a variety of resources including Internet access, conference calls,

printing documents on shared printers, or by simply logging on to the Internet.

Web Interface

To configure a Network Access Server in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Network and NAS.

2. Select Enabled in the Mode of Network Access Server Configuration.

3. Checked Reauthentication Enabled.

4. Set Reauthentication Period (Default is 3600 seconds).

5. Set EAPOL Timeout (Default is 30 seconds).

6. Set Aging Period (Default is 300 seconds).

7. Set Hold Time (Default is 10 seconds).

8. Checked RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled.

9. Checked RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled.

10. Checked Guest VLAN Enabled.

11. Specify Guest VLAN ID.

12. Specify Max. Reauth. Count.

13. Checked Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen.

14. Click Apply.

72 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

72 72

Figure 2-5.2.2: The Network Access Server Configuration

Parameter description:

System Configuration

Mode :

Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled, all ports

are allowed forwarding of frames.

Reauthentication Enabled :

If checked, successfully authenticated supplicants/clients are reauthenticated after the

interval specified by the Reauthentication Period. Reauthentication for 802.1X-enabled ports

can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no

longer attached.

For MAC-based ports, reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has

changed. It does not involve communication between the switch and the client, and

therefore doesn't imply that a client is still present on a port (see Aging Period below).

Reauthentication Period :

Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be reauthenticated.

This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked. Valid values are in

the range 1 to 3600 seconds.

EAPOL Timeout :

73 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

73 73

Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames.

Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds. This has no effect for MAC-based ports.

Aging Period :

This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security functionality

to secure MAC addresses:

Single 802.1X

Multi 802.1X

MAC-Based Auth.

When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses, the Port

Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular

intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time. This

parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000

seconds.

If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802.1X-based mode, this is not so critical,

since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next

re-authentication, which will fail. But if re-authentication is not enabled, the only way to free

resources is by aging the entries.

For ports in MAC-based Auth. mode, reauthentication doesn't cause direct communication

between the switch and the client, so this will not detect whether the client is still attached

or not, and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry.

Hold Time :

This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security functionality

to secure MAC addresses:

Single 802.1X

Multi 802.1X

MAC-Based Auth.

If a client is denied access - either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or

because the RADIUS server request times out (according to the timeout specified on the

"ConfigurationSecurityAAA" page) - the client is put on hold in the Un-authorized state.

The hold timer does not count during an on-going authentication.

In MAC-based Auth. mode, the switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during

the hold time.

The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.

RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled :

RADIUS-assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic

coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch. The RADIUS

server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this

feature (see RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description).

The "RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally

enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class functionality. When checked, the

individual ports' ditto setting determine whether RADIUS-assigned QoS Class is enabled on

that port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports.

RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled :

RADIUS-assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a

74 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

74 74

successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch. Incoming traffic will be

classified to and switched on the RADIUS-assigned VLAN. The RADIUS server must be

configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature

(see RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description).

The "RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally

enable/disable RADIUS-server assigned VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual

ports' ditto setting determine whether RADIUS-assigned VLAN is enabled on that port.

When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned VLAN is disabled on all ports.

Guest VLAN Enabled :

A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN - typically with limited network access - on which

802.1X-unaware clients are placed after a network administrator-defined timeout. The

switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below.

The "Guest VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable Guest

VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determines whether

the port can be moved into Guest VLAN. When unchecked, the ability to move to the Guest

VLAN is disabled on all ports.

Guest VLAN ID :

This is the value that a port's Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN. It

is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.

Valid values are in the range [1; 4095].

Max. Reauth. Count :

The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without

response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting. The

value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.

Valid values are in the range [1; 255].

Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen :

The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life-time of the

port. Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN, it will first check if this

option is enabled or disabled. If disabled (unchecked; default), the switch will only enter the

Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life-time of the port. If enabled

(checked), the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been

received on the port for the life-time of the port.

The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.

Port Configuration

The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns, which

are:

Port :

The port number for which the configuration below applies.

Admin State :

If NAS is globally enabled, this selection controls the port's authentication mode. The

following modes are available:

Force Authorized :

In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes

up, and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication.

Force Unauthorized :

75 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

75 75

In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes

up, and any client on the port will be disallowed network access.

Port-based 802.1X :

In the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, and

the RADIUS server is the authentication server. The authenticator acts as the

man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the

authentication server. Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special

802.1X frames, known as EAPOL (EAP Over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP

PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS

packets. RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like

the switch's IP address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very

flexible, in that it allows for different authentication methods, like MD5-Challenge, PEAP,

and TLS. The important thing is that the authenticator (the switch) doesn't need to know

which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using, or

how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method. The switch

simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS)

and forwards it.

When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a

success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the switch

uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant

NOTE: Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server

timeout is configured to X seconds (using the AAA configuration

page), and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down

(but not considered dead).

Now, if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster

than X seconds, then it will never get authenticated, because the

switch will cancel on-going backend authentication server requests

whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant.

And since the server hasn't yet failed (because the X seconds haven't

expired), the same server will be contacted upon the next backend

authentication server request from the switch. This scenario will loop

forever. Therefore, the server timeout should be smaller than the

supplicant's EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate.

Single 802.1X :

In port-based 802.1X authentication, once a supplicant is successfully authenticated

on a port, the whole port is opened for network traffic. This allows other clients

connected to the port (for instance through a hub) to piggy-back on the successfully

authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren't

authenticated. To overcome this security breach, use the Single 802.1X variant. Single

802.1X is really not an IEEE standard, but features many of the same characteristics as

does port-based 802.1X. In Single 802.1X, at most one supplicant can get

authenticated on the port at a time. Normal EAPOL frames are used in the

communication between the supplicant and the switch. If more than one supplicant is

connected to a port, the one that comes first when the port's link comes up will be the

first one considered. If that supplicant doesn't provide valid credentials within a certain

amount of time, another supplicant will get a chance. Once a supplicant is successfully

authenticated, only that supplicant will be allowed access. This is the most secure of all

the supported modes. In this mode, the Port Security module is used to secure a

76 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

76 76

supplicant's MAC address once successfully authenticated.

Multi 802.1X :

In port-based 802.1X authentication, once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a

port, the whole port is opened for network traffic. This allows other clients connected to

the port (for instance through a hub) to piggy-back on the successfully authenticated

client and get network access even though they really aren't authenticated. To overcome

this security breach, use the Multi 802.1X variant.

Multi 802.1X is really not an IEEE standard, but features many of the same characteristics

as does port-based 802.1X. Multi 802.1X is - like Single 802.1X - not an IEEE standard, but

a variant that features many of the same characteristics. In Multi 802.1X, one or more

supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time. Each supplicant is

authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module.

In Multi 802.1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination

MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant, since that

would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch.

Instead, the switch uses the supplicant's MAC address, which is obtained from the first

EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant. An exception to

this is when no supplicants are attached. In this case, the switch sends EAPOL Request

Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination - to wake up any

supplicants that might be on the port.

The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using

the Port Security Limit Control functionality.

MAC-based Auth.:

Unlike port-based 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but merely a

best-practices method adopted by the industry. In MAC-based authentication, users are

called clients, and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients. The initial frame

(any kind of frame) sent by a client is snooped by the switch, which in turn uses the

client's MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange

with the RADIUS server. The 6-byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following

form "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-cased

hexadecimal digits. The switch only supports the MD5-Challenge authentication method,

so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly.

When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication,

which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client, using

the Port Security module. Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the

switch. There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication, and therefore,

MAC-based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.

The advantage of MAC-based authentication over port-based 802.1X is that several

clients can be connected to the same port (e.g. through a 3rd party switch or a hub) and

still require individual authentication, and that the clients don't need special supplicant

software to authenticate. The advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X-based

authentication is that the clients don't need special supplicant software to authenticate.

The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users - equipment

whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone. Also, only the

MD5-Challenge method is supported. The maximum number of clients that can be

attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality.

RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled :

When RADIUS-Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) on a given

port, the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access-Accept packet

77 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

77 77

transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated. If present

and valid, traffic received on the supplicant's port will be classified to the given QoS Class. If

(re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class

or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port, the port's QoS

Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class (which may be changed by the

administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS-assigned).

This option is only available for single-client modes, i.e.

Port-based 802.1X

Single 802.1X

RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class:

Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in

order to successfully identify a QoS Class. The User-Priority-Table attribute defined in

RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access-Accept packet.

Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered, and to be valid, it

must follow this rule:

All 8 octets in the attribute's value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the

range '0' - '3', which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range [0; 3].

RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled :

When RADIUS-Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given

port, the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access-Accept packet

transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated. If present

and valid, the port's Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID, the port will be set to be

a member of that VLAN ID, and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode. Once

assigned, all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the

RADIUS-assigned VLAN ID.

If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID

or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port, the port's VLAN

ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID (which may be changed by the

administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS-assigned).

This option is only available for single-client modes, i.e.

Port-based 802.1X

Single 802.1X

For trouble-shooting VLAN assignments, use the "MonitorVLANsVLAN Membership

and VLAN Port" pages. These pages show which modules have (temporarily) overridden the

current Port VLAN configuration.

RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID:

RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an

Access-Accept packet. The following criteria are used:

The Tunnel-Medium-Type, Tunnel-Type, and Tunnel-Private-Group-ID attributes must all

be present at least once in the Access-Accept packet.

The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil

the following requirements (if Tag == 0 is used, the Tunnel-Private-Group-ID does not need

to include a Tag):

- Value of Tunnel-Medium-Type must be set to "IEEE-802" (ordinal 6).

- Value of Tunnel-Type must be set to "VLAN" (ordinal 13).

78 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

78 78

- Value of Tunnel-Private-Group-ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range '0' - '9',

which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID. Leading '0's are discarded.

The final value must be in the range [1; 4095].

Guest VLAN Enabled :

When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given port, the

switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined

below.

This option is only available for EAPOL-based modes, i.e.:

Port-based 802.1X

Single 802.1X

Multi 802.1X

For trouble-shooting VLAN assignments, use the "MonitorVLANsVLAN Membership

and VLAN Port" pages. These pages show which modules have (temporarily) overridden the

current Port VLAN configuration.

Guest VLAN Operation:

When a Guest VLAN enabled port's link comes up, the switch starts transmitting EAPOL

Request Identity frames. If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max. Reauth.

Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile, the switch considers

entering the Guest VLAN. The interval between transmissions of EAPOL Request Identity

frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout. If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled,

the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN. If disabled, the switch will first check its

history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port (this history is

cleared if the port link goes down or the port's Admin State is changed), and if not, the port

will be placed in the Guest VLAN. Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN, but

continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout.

Once in the Guest VLAN, the port is considered authenticated, and all attached clients on

the port are allowed access on this VLAN. The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success

frame when entering the Guest VLAN.

While in the Guest VLAN, the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames, and if one such

frame is received, the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts

authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode. If an EAPOL frame is received, the

port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the "Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL

Seen" is disabled.

Port State :

The current state of the port. It can undertake one of the following values:

Globally Disabled: NAS is globally disabled.

Link Down: NAS is globally enabled, but there is no link on the port.

Authorized: The port is in Force Authorized or a single-supplicant mode and the supplicant

is authorized.

Unauthorized: The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single-supplicant mode and the

supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.

X Auth/Y Unauth: The port is in a multi-supplicant mode. Currently X clients are authorized

and Y are unauthorized.

Restart :

Two buttons are available for each row. The buttons are only enabled when authentication is

79 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

79 79

globally enabled and the port's Admin State is in an EAPOL-based or MAC-based mode.

Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect.

Re-authenticate: Schedules a re-authentication whenever the quiet-period of the port runs

out (EAPOL-based authentication). For MAC-based authentication, re-authentication will be

attempted immediately.

The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not

cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized.

Reinitialize: Forces a re-initialization of the clients on the port and thereby a

re-authentication immediately. The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the

re-authentication is in progress.

Buttons

Refresh :

You can click them for refresh the NAS Configuration by manual.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

80 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

80 80

2-5.2.3 ACL

The PSGS-2626GF Series switch access control list (ACL) is probably the most commonly used

object in the IOS. It is used for packet filtering but also for selecting types of traffic to be

analyzed, forwarded, or influenced in some way. The ACLs are divided into Ether Types. IPv4,

ARP protocol, MAC and VLAN parameters etc. Here we will just go over the standard and

extended access lists for TCP/IP. As you create ACEs for ingress classification, you can assign a

policy for each port, the policy number is 1-8, and however, each policy can be applied to any

port. This makes it very easy to determine what type of ACL policy you will be working with.

2-5.2.3.1 Ports

The section describes how to configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of the each switch port.

These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE

Web Interface

To configure the ACL Ports Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Network, ACL and Ports.

2. To scroll the specific parameter value to select the correct value for port ACL setting.

3. Click the save to save the setting

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

5. After you configure complete then you could see the Counter of the port. Then you could

click refresh to update the counter or Clear the information.

Figure 2-5.2.3.1: The ACL Ports Configuration

Parameter description:

81 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

81 81

Port :

The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

Policy ID :

Select the policy to apply to this port. The allowed values are 1 through 8. The default value

is 1.

Action :

Select whether forwarding is permitted ("Permit") or denied ("Deny"). The default value is

"Permit".

Rate Limiter ID :

Select which rate limiter to apply on this port. The allowed values are Disabled or the values

1 through 16. The default value is "Disabled".

Port Redirect :

Select which port frames are redirected on. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific

port number and it can't be set when action is permitted. The default value is "Disabled".

Logging :

Specify the logging operation of this port. The allowed values are:

Enabled: Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log.

Disabled: Frames received on the port are not logged.

The default value is "Disabled". Please note that the System Log memory size and logging

rate is limited.

Shutdown :

Specify the port shut down operation of this port. The allowed values are:

Enabled: If a frame is received on the port, the port will be disabled.

Disabled: Port shut down is disabled.

The default value is "Disabled".

State :

Specify the port state of this port. The allowed values are:

Enabled: To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user

module.

Disabled: To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module.

The default value is "Enabled"

Counter :

Counts the number of frames that match this ACE.

Buttons

Refresh, clear :

You can click them for refresh the ACL Port Configuration or clear them by manual.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

82 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

82 82

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

2-5.2.3.2 Rate Limiters

The section describes how to configure the switchs ACL Rate Limiter parameters. The Rate

Limiter Level from 1 to 16 that allow user to set rate limiter value and units with pps.

Web Interface

To configure ACL Rate Limiter in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Network, ACL and Rate Limiter.

2. To specific the Rate field and the range from 0 to 3276700.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-5.2.3.2: The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration

Parameter description:

Rate Limiter ID :

The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row.

Rate :

The allowed values are: 0-3276700 in pps.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

83 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

83 83

2-5.2.3.3 Access Control List

The section describes how to configure Access Control List rule. An Access Control List (ACL) is

a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses, MAC addresses, or

other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress packets against the conditions in an ACL

one by one. A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon

as it matches a deny rule. If no rules match, the frame is accepted. Other actions can also be

invoked when a matching packet is found, including rate limiting, copying matching packets to

another port or to the system log, or shutting down a port.

This page shows the Access Control List (ACL), which is made up of the ACEs defined on this

switch. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on

each switch. Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list. The reserved ACEs used

for internal protocol, cannot be edited or deleted, the order sequence cannot be changed the

priority is highest.

Web Interface

1. To configure Access Control List in the web interface:

2. Click Configuration, Security, Network, ACL and Access Control List.

3. Click the button to add a new ACL, or use the other ACL modification buttons to

specify the editing action (i.e., edit, delete, or moving the relative position of entry in the

list)

4. To specific the parameter of the ACE

5. Click the save to save the setting

6. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

7. When editing an entry on the ACE Configuration page, note that the Items displayed

depend on various selections, such as Frame Type and IP Protocol Type. Specify the

relevant criteria to be matched for this rule, and set the actions to take when a rule is

matched (such as Rate Limiter, Port Copy, Logging, and Shutdown).

84 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

84 84

Figure 2-5.2.3.3: The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration

Parameter description:

Ingress Port :

Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:

Any: The ACE will match any ingress port.

Policy: The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy.

Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.

Policy / Bitmask :

Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE.

Frame Type :

Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:

Any: The ACE will match any frame type.

EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will

not get matched by IP and ARP frames.

ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.

IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.

IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.

IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.

IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.

IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.

IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.

Action :

Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.

Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.

Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.

85 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

85 85

Filter: Frames matching the ACE are filtered.

Rate Limiter :

Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When Disabled is

displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.

Port Redirect :

Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are redirected to

the port number. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number.

When Disabled is displayed, the port redirect operation is disabled.

Mirror :

Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the

destination mirror port. The allowed values are:

Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.

Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.

The default value is "Disabled".

Counter :

The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.

Modification Buttons :

You can modify each ACE (Access Control Entry) in the table using the following buttons:

: Inserts a new ACE before the current row.

: Edits the ACE row.

: Moves the ACE up the list.

: Moves the ACE down the list.

: Deletes the ACE.

: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings.

ACE Configuration

An ACE consists of several parameters. These parameters vary according to the frame type

that you select. First select the ingress port for the ACE, and then select the frame type.

Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type selected.

A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here.

Ingress Port :

Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies.

All: The ACE applies to all port.

Port n: The ACE applies to this port number, where n is the number of the switch port.

Policy Filter :

Specify the policy number filter for this ACE.

Any: No policy filter is specified. (policy filter status is "don't-care".)

Specific: If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE, choose this value. Two field for

entering an policy value and bitmask appears.

Policy Value :

When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy value. The

allowed range is 0 to 255.

Policy Bitmask :

When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy bitmask. The

86 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

86 86

allowed range is 0x0 to 0xff. Notice the usage of bitmask, if the binary bit value is "0", it

means this bit is "don't-care". The real matched pattern is [policy_value & policy_bitmask].

For example, if the policy value is 3 and the policy bitmask is 0x10(bit 0 is "don't-care" bit),

then policy 2 and 3 are applied to this rule.

Frame Type :

Select the frame type for this ACE. These frame types are mutually exclusive.

Any: Any frame can match this ACE.

Ethernet Type: Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE. The IEEE 802.3 describes the

value of Length/Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal (equal

to 0600 hexadecimal).

ARP: Only ARP frames can match this ACE. Notice the ARP frames won't match the ACE with

ethernet type.

IPv4: Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv4 frames won't match the ACE with

ethernet type.

IPv6: Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv6 frames won't match the ACE with

Ethernet type.

Action :

Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.

Permit: The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation.

Deny: The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.

Filter: Frames matching the ACE are filtered.

Rate Limiter :

Specify the rate limiter in number of base units. The allowed range is 1 to 16. Disabled

indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled.

Port Redirect :

Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here. The rate limiter

will affect these ports. The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range.

Disabled indicates that the port redirect operation is disabled and the specific port number

of 'Port Redirect' can't be set when action is permitted.

Mirror :

Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to the

destination mirror port. The rate limiter will not affect frames on the mirror port. The

allowed values are:

Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.

Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.

The default value is "Disabled".

Logging :

Specify the logging operation of the ACE. Notice that the logging message doesn't include

the 4 bytes CRC information. The allowed values are:

Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.

Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.

Note: The logging feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518(without

VLAN tags) and the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.

87 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

87 87

Shutdown :

Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:

Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.

Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.

Note: The shutdown feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518(without

VLAN tags).

Counter :

The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.

MAC Parameter

SMAC Filter :

(Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP.)

Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE.

Any: No SMAC filter is specified. (SMAC filter status is "don't-care".)

Specific: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE, choose this value.

A field for entering an SMAC value appears.

SMAC Value :

When "Specific" is selected for the SMAC filter, you can enter a specific source MAC address.

The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or "xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or "xxxxxxxxxxxx" (x is a

hexadecimal digit). A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value.

DMAC Filter :

Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.

Any: No DMAC filter is specified. (DMAC filter status is "don't-care".)

MC: Frame must be multicast.

BC: Frame must be broadcast.

UC: Frame must be unicast.

Specific: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE, choose this

value. A field for entering a DMAC value appears.

DMAC Value :

When "Specific" is selected for the DMAC filter, you can enter a specific destination MAC

address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or "xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or "xxxxxxxxxxxx" (x is a

hexadecimal digit). A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value.

VLAN Parameters

802.1Q Tagged :

Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802.1Q tagged. The allowed

values are:

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

Enabled: Tagged frame only.

Disabled: Untagged frame only.

The default value is "Any".

VLAN ID Filter :

88 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

88 88

Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE.

Any: No VLAN ID filter is specified. (VLAN ID filter status is "don't-care".)

Specific: If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE, choose this value. A field for

entering a VLAN ID number appears.

VLAN ID :

When "Specific" is selected for the VLAN ID filter, you can enter a specific VLAN ID number.

The allowed range is 1 to 4095. A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value.

Tag Priority :

Specify the tag priority for this ACE. A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority. The

allowed number range is 0 to 7 or range 0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3 and 4-7. The value Any

means that no tag priority is specified (tag priority is "don't-care".)

ARP Parameters

The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "ARP" is selected.

ARP/RARP :

Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.

Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)

ARP: Frame must have ARP opcode set to ARP.

RARP: Frame must have RARP opcode set to RARP.

Other: Frame has unknown ARP/RARP Opcode flag.

Request/Reply :

Specify the available Request/Reply opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.

Any: No Request/Reply OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)

Request: Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set.

Reply: Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag.

Sender IP Filter :

Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE.

Any: No sender IP filter is specified. (Sender IP filter is "don't-care".)

Host: Sender IP filter is set to Host. Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field

that appears.

Network: Sender IP filter is set to Network. Specify the sender IP address and sender IP

mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.

Sender IP Address :

When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender

IP address in dotted decimal notation.

Sender IP Mask :

When "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender IP mask

in dotted decimal notation.

Target IP Filter :

Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE.

Any: No target IP filter is specified. (Target IP filter is "don't-care".)

89 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

89 89

Host: Target IP filter is set to Host. Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field

that appears. Network: Target IP filter is set to Network. Specify the target IP address and

target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear.

Target IP Address :

When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target

IP address in dotted decimal notation.

Target IP Mask :

When "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target IP mask in

dotted decimal notation.

ARP Sender MAC Match :

Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field

(SHA) settings.

0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address.

1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

RARP Target MAC Match :

Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field

(THA) settings.

0: RARP frames where THA is not equal to the target MAC address.

1: RARP frames where THA is equal to the target MAC address.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

IP/Ethernet Length :

Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address

length (HLN) and protocol address length (PLN) settings.

0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is not equal to Ethernet (0x06) or the (PLN) is not equal

to IPv4 (0x04).

1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN) is equal to IPv4

(0x04).

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

Ethernet :

Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address

space (HRD) settings.

0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is not equal to Ethernet (1).

1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

IP :

Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP protocol address

space (PRO) settings.

0: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is not equal to IP (0x800).

1: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

90 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

90 90

IP Parameters

The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "IPv4" is selected.

IP Protocol Filter :

Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE.

Any: No IP protocol filter is specified ("don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE, choose this value. A

field for entering an IP protocol filter appears.

ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP

parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.

UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining UDP parameters

will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.

TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP parameters

will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.

IP Protocol Value :

When "Specific" is selected for the IP protocol value, you can enter a specific value. The

allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value.

IP TTL :

Specify the Time-to-Live settings for this ACE.

zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this

entry.

non-zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must be able to match this

entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

IP Fragment :

Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE. This involves the settings for the More

Fragments (MF) bit and the Fragment Offset (FRAG OFFSET) field for an IPv4 frame.

No: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must

not be able to match this entry.

Yes: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must

be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

IP Option :

Specify the options flag setting for this ACE.

No: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry.

Yes: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

SIP Filter :

Specify the source IP filter for this ACE.

Any: No source IP filter is specified. (Source IP filter is "don't-care".)

Host: Source IP filter is set to Host. Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that

appears.

91 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

91 91

Network: Source IP filter is set to Network. Specify the source IP address and source IP mask

in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.

SIP Address :

When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP

address in dotted decimal notation.

SIP Mask :

When "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP mask in

dotted decimal notation.

DIP Filter :

Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE.

Any: No destination IP filter is specified. (Destination IP filter is "don't-care".)

Host: Destination IP filter is set to Host. Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address

field that appears.

Network: Destination IP filter is set to Network. Specify the destination IP address and

destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear.

DIP Address :

When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific

DIP address in dotted decimal notation.

DIP Mask :

When "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP mask in

dotted decimal notation.

IPv6 Parameters

The IPv6 parameters can be configured when Frame Type "IPv6" is selected.

Next Header Filter :

Specify the IPv6 next header filter for this ACE.

Any: No IPv6 next header filter is specified ("don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific IPv6 next header filter with this ACE, choose this value.

A field for entering an IPv6 next header filter appears.

ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv6 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP

parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.

UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv6 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining UDP parameters

will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.

TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv6 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP parameters

will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.

Next Header Value :

When "Specific" is selected for the IPv6 next header value, you can enter a specific value.

The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IPv6 protocol value.

SIP Filter :

Specify the source IPv6 filter for this ACE.

Any: No source IPv6 filter is specified. (Source IPv6 filter is "don't-care".)

Specific: Source IPv6 filter is set to Network. Specify the source IPv6 address and source IPv6

mask in the SIP Address fields that appear.

92 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

92 92

SIP Address :

When "Specific" is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specific SIPv6 address.

The field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address.

SIP BitMask :

When "Specific" is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specific SIPv6 mask. The

field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address. Notice the usage of bitmask, if the binary

bit value is "0", it means this bit is "don't-care". The real matched pattern is [sipv6_address &

sipv6_bitmask] (last 32 bits). For example, if the SIPv6 address is 2001::3 and the SIPv6

bitmask is 0xFFFFFFFE(bit 0 is "don't-care" bit), then SIPv6 address 2001::2 and 2001::3 are

applied to this rule.

Hop Limit :

Specify the hop limit settings for this ACE.

zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must not be able to match this

entry.

non-zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must be able to match this

entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

ICMP Parameters

ICMP Type Filter :

Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE.

Any: No ICMP filter is specified (ICMP filter status is "don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific

ICMP value. A field for entering an ICMP value appears.

ICMP Type Value :

When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP filter, you can enter a specific ICMP value. The

allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value.

ICMP Code Filter :

Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.

Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific

ICMP code value. A field for entering an ICMP code value appears.

ICMP Code Value :

When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP code filter, you can enter a specific ICMP code

value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code

value.

TCP/UDP Parameters

TCP/UDP Source Filter :

Specify the TCP/UDP source filter for this ACE.

Any: No TCP/UDP source filter is specified (TCP/UDP source filter status is "don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source filter with this ACE, you can enter a

specific TCP/UDP source value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value appears.

Range: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source range filter with this ACE, you can

93 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

93 93

enter a specific TCP/UDP source range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value

appears.

TCP/UDP Source No. :

When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP

source value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this

TCP/UDP source value.

TCP/UDP Source Range :

When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP

source range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches this

TCP/UDP source value.

TCP/UDP Destination Filter :

Specify the TCP/UDP destination filter for this ACE.

Any: No TCP/UDP destination filter is specified (TCP/UDP destination filter status is

"don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you can

enter a specific TCP/UDP destination value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP destination value

appears.

Range: If you want to filter a specific range TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you can

enter a specific TCP/UDP destination range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP destination

value appears.

TCP/UDP Destination Number :

When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific

TCP/UDP destination value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE

matches this TCP/UDP destination value.

TCP/UDP Destination Range :

When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific

TCP/UDP destination range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this

ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.

TCP FIN :

Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

TCP SYN :

Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

TCP RST :

Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry.

94 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

94 94

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

TCP PSH :

Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

TCP ACK :

Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

TCP URG :

Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this ACE.

0: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry.

1: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.

Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

Ethernet Type Parameters

The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type "Ethernet Type" is

selected.

EtherType Filter :

Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE.

Any: No EtherType filter is specified (EtherType filter status is "don't-care").

Specific: If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific

EtherType value. A field for entering a EtherType value appears.

Ethernet Type Value :

When "Specific" is selected for the EtherType filter, you can enter a specific EtherType value.

The allowed range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF but excluding 0x800(IPv4), 0x806(ARP) and

0x86DD(IPv6). A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh :

To evoke the auto-refresh to refresh the information automatically.

Refresh, clear, Remove All :

You can click them for refresh the ACL configuration or clear them by manual. Others

remove all to clean up all ACL configurations on the table.

Cancel : Return to the previous page.

95 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

95 95

2-5.2.4 IP Source Guard

The section describes to configure the IP Source Guard detail parameters of the switch. You

could use the IP Source Guard configure to enable or disable with the Port of the switch.

2-5.2.4.1 Configuration

This section describes how to configure IP Source Guard setting including:

Mode (Enabled and Disabled)

Maximum Dynamic Clients (0, 1, 2, Unlimited)

Web Interface

To configure an IP Source Guard Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Network, IP Source Guard and Configuration.

2. Select Enabled in the Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration.

3. Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration.

4. Select Maximum Dynamic Clients (0, 1, 2, Unlimited) of the specific port in the Mode of

Port Mode Configuration.

5. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.2.4.1: The IP Source Guard Configuration

Parameter description:

Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration :

Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard. All configured

ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled.

Port Mode Configuration :

Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port

96 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

96 96

Mode on a given port are enabled, IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port.

Max Dynamic Clients :

Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port. This

value can be 0, 1, 2 or unlimited. If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic

client is equal to 0, it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static

entries on the specific port.

Buttons

Translate dynamic to static :

Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

97 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

97 97

2-5.2.4.2 Static Table

The section describes to configure the Static IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch.

You could use the Static IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries.

Web Interface

To configure a Static IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Network, IP Source Guard and Static Table.

2. Click Add New Entry.

3. Specify the Port, VLAN ID, IP Address, and MAC address in the entry.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.2.4.2: The Static IP Source Guard Table

Parameter description:

Port :

The logical port for the settings.

VLAN ID :

The VLAN id for the settings.

IP Address :

Allowed Source IP address.

MAC address :

Allowed Source MAC address.

Buttons

Adding new entry :

98 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

98 98

Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table. Specify the Port, VLAN ID, IP

address, and IP Mask for the new entry. Click "Save".

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

99 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

99 99

2-5.2.5 ARP Inspection

The section describes to configure the ARP Inspection parameters of the switch. You could use

the ARP Inspection configure to manage the ARP table.

2-5.2.5.1 Port Configuration

This section describes how to configure ARP Inspection setting including:

Mode (Enabled and Disabled)

Port (Enabled and Disabled)

Web Interface

To configure an ARP Inspection Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Network, ARP Inspection and Configuration.

2. Select Enabled in the Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration.

3. Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.2.5.1: The ARP Inspection Configuration.

Parameter description:

Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration :

Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection.

Port Mode Configuration :

Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port

Mode on a given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port. Possible

modes are:

Enabled: Enable ARP Inspection operation.

Disabled: Disable ARP Inspection operation.

100 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

100 100

If you want to inspect the VLAN configuration, you have to enable the setting of "Check

VLAN". The default setting of "Check VLAN" is disabled. When the setting of "Check VLAN"

is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting. And the setting of

"Check VLAN" is enabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the VLAN setting.

Possible setting of "Check VLAN" are:

Enabled: Enable check VLAN operation.

Disabled: Disable check VLAN operation.

Only the Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, and the setting of

"Check VLAN" is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting. There

are four log types and possible types are:

None: Log nothing.

Deny: Log denied entries.

Permit: Log permitted entries.

ALL: Log all entries.

Buttons

Translate dynamic to static :

Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

101 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

101 101

2-5.2.5.2 VLAN Configuration

Each page shows up to 9999 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected through

the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries

from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN

ID found in the VLAN Table.

The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table. Clicking

the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next VLAN Table

match. The will use the next entry of the currently displayed VLAN entry as a basis for the next

lookup. When the end is reached the warning message is shown in the displayed table. Use the

button to start over.

Web Interface

To configure a VLAN Mode Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Network, ARP Inspection and VLAN Mode Configuration.

2. Click Add new entry.

3. Specify the VLAN ID, Log Type

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.2.5.2: The VLAN Mode Configuration

Parameter description:

102 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

102 102

VLAN Mode Configuration :

Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which VLANs. First, you have to enable the port setting

on Port mode configuration web page. Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a

given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port. Second, you can

specify which VLAN will be inspected on VLAN mode configuration web page. The log type

also can be configured on per VLAN setting.

Possible types are:

None: Log nothing.

Deny: Log denied entries.

Permit: Log permitted entries.

ALL: Log all entries.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new VLAN to the ARP Inspection VLAN table.

103 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

103 103

2-5.2.5.3 Static Table

The section describes to configure the Static ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch.

You could use the Static ARP Inspection Table configure to manage the ARP entries.

Web Interface

To configure a Static ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Network, ARP Inspection and Static Table.

2. Click Add New Entry.

3. Specify the Port, VLAN ID, IP Address, and MAC address in the entry.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.2.5.3: The Static ARP Inspection Table

Parameter description:

Port :

The logical port for the settings.

VLAN ID :

The vlan id for the settings.

MAC Address :

Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets.

IP Address :

Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets.

Buttons

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

104 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

104 104

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Add New Entry :

Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table. Specify the Port, VLAN ID, MAC

address, and IP address for the new entry. Click "Save".

105 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

105 105

2-5.2.5.4 Dynamic Table

Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic ARP

Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries, and is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID, then

by MAC address, and then by IP address.

Navigating the ARP Inspection Table

Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table, default being 20,

selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show

the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.

The "Start from port address", "VLAN", "MAC address" and "IP address" input fields allow the

user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table. Clicking the button will

update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table

match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a button click - assume the value of the first

displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.

The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When

the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the button

to start over.

Web Interface

To configure a Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, Network, ARP Inspection and Dynamic Table.

2. Select Port in the Mode of Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.

3. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.2.5.4: The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table

Parameter description:

Port :

Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.

VLAN ID :

VLAN-ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted.

MAC Address :

106 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

106 106

User MAC address of the entry.

IP Address :

User IP address of the entry.

Translate to static :

Select the checkbox to translate the entry to static entry.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

Save :

Click to save changes.

<< :

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.

>> :

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed

107 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

107 107

2-5.3 AAA

This section shows you to use an AAA (Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting) server

to provide access control to your network. The AAA server can be a TACACS+ or RADIUS server

to create and manage objects that contain settings for using AAA servers.

2-5.3.1 RADIUS

Web Interface

To configure a Common Configuration of AAA, RADIUS in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, AAA and RADIUS.

2. Click Add New Server.

3. Specify the Hostname, Auth Port, Acct Port, Timeout, Retransmit and Key in the server.

4. Click Apply.

108 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

108 108

Figure 2-5.3.1: The RADIUS Server Configuration

Parameter description:

Global Configuration

These setting are common for all of the RADIUS servers.

Timeout :

Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply from a RADIUS

server before retransmitting the request.

Retransmit :

Retransmit is the number of times, in the range 1 to 1000, a RADIUS request is retransmitted

to a server that is not responding. If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it

is considered to be dead.

Deadtime :

Deadtime, which can be set to a number between 0 to 1440 minutes, is the period during

which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a

previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it

has already determined as dead.

Setting the Deadtime to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if

more than one server has been configured.

Key :

The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the RADIUS server and the

switch.

NAS-IP-Address (Attribute 4) :

The IPv4 address to be used as attribute 4 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this field is

left blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is used.

NAS-IPv6-Address (Attribute 95) :

The IPv6 address to be used as attribute 95 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this field is

left blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is used.

NAS-Identifier (Attribute 32) :

The identifier - up to 255 characters long - to be used as attribute 32 in RADIUS

Access-Request packets. If this field is left blank, the NAS-Identifier is not included in the

packet.

Server Configuration

The table has one row for each RADIUS server and a number of columns, which are:

Hostname :

109 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

109 109

The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server.

Auth Port :

The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for authentication.

Acct Port :

The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for accounting.

Timeout :

This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank will use the global

timeout value.

Retransmit :

This optional setting overrides the global retransmit value. Leaving it blank will use the

global retransmit value.

Key :

This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the global key.

Buttons

Delete :

This button can be used to undo the addition of the new server.

Add New Server :

Click to add a new RADIUS server. An empty row is added to the table, and the RADIUS

server can be configured as needed. Up to 5 servers are supported.

The button can be used to undo the addition of the new server.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

110 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

110 110

2-5.3.2 TACACS+

This page allows you to configure the TACACS+ servers.

Web Interface

To configure the TACACS+ servers in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Security, AAA and TACACS+.

2. Click Add New Server.

3. Specify the Hostname, Port, Timeout and Key in the server.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-5.3.2: The TACACS+ Server Configuration

Parameter description:

Global Configuration

These setting are common for all of the TACACS+ servers.

Timeout :

Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply from a

111 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

111 111

TACACS+ server before it is considered to be dead.

Deadtime :

Deadtime, which can be set to a number between 0 to 1440 minutes, is the period during

which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a

previous request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it

has already determined as dead.

Setting the Deadtime to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if

more than one server has been configured.

Key :

The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the TACACS+ server and the

switch.

Server Configuration

The table has one row for each TACACS+ server and a number of columns, which are:

Delete :

To delete a TACACS+ server entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next

Save.

Hostname :

The IP address or hostname of the TACACS+ server.

Port :

The TCP port to use on the TACACS+ server for authentication.

Timeout :

This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank will use the global

timeout value.

Key :

This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the global key.

Buttons

Delete :

This button can be used to undo the addition of the new server.

Add New Server :

Click to add a new TACACS+ server. An empty row is added to the table, and the TACACS+

server can be configured as needed. Up to 5 servers are supported.

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

112 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

112 112

2-6 Aggregation

2-6.1 Static

Web Interface

To configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Aggregation and Static.

2. Evoke to enable or disable the aggregation mode function.

3. Evoke Aggregation Group ID and Port members.

4. Click Apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-6.1: The Aggregation Mode Configuration

Parameter description:

Hash Code Contributors

Source MAC Address :

The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check

to enable the use of the Source MAC address, or uncheck to disable. By default, Source MAC

Address is enabled.

Destination MAC Address :

The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame.

Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address, or uncheck to disable. By default,

Destination MAC Address is disabled.

113 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

113 113

IP Address :

The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable

the use of the IP Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, IP Address is enabled.

TCP/UDP Port Number :

The TCP/UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame.

Check to enable the use of the TCP/UDP Port Number, or uncheck to disable. By default,

TCP/UDP Port Number is enabled.

Aggregation Group Configuration

Group ID :

Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row. Group ID "Normal"

indicates there is no aggregation. Only one group ID is valid per port.

Port Members :

Each switch port is listed for each group ID. Select a radio button to include a port in an

aggregation, or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation. By default,

no ports belong to any aggregation group. Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation

and ports must be in the same speed in each group.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

114 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

114 114

2-6.2 LACP

This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations, and possibly change

them as well.

Web Interface

To configure the LACP Port Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Aggregation and LACP.

2. Evoke to enable or disable the LACP on the port of the switch.

3. Scroll the Key parameter with Auto or Specific. Default is Auto.

4. Scroll the Role with Active or Passive. Default is Active.

5. Click Apply to save the setting.

6. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-6.2: The LACP Port Configuration

Parameter description:

Port :

The switch port number.

LACP Enabled :

Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port. LACP will form an aggregation when

2 or more ports are connected to the same partner.

Key :

The Key value incurred by the port, range 1-65535 . The Auto setting will set the key as

appropriate by the physical link speed, 10Mb = 1, 100Mb = 2, 1Gb = 3. Using the Specific

setting, a user-defined value can be entered. Ports with the same Key value can participate

in the same aggregation group, while ports with different keys cannot.

Role :

The Role shows the LACP activity status. The Active will transmit LACP packets each second,

115 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

115 115

while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner (speak if spoken to).

Timeout :

The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions. Fast will transmit LACP

packets each second, while Slow will wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet.

Prio :

The Prio controls the priority of the port. If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group

than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active

and which ports will be in a backup role. Lower number means greater priority.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

116 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

116 116

2-7 Loop Protection

This page allows the user to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations, and possibly

change them as well.

Web Interface

To configure the Loop Protection parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Loop Protection.

2. Evoke to select enable or disable the port loop Protection.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-8: The Loop Protection Configuration

Parameter description:

General Settings

Enable Loop Protection :

Controls whether loop protections is enabled (as a whole).

Transmission Time :

The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port. Valid values are 1 to 10

seconds.

Shutdown Time :

117 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

117 117

The period (in seconds) for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is

detected (and the port action shuts down the port). Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds (7

days). A value of zero will keep a port disabled (until next device restart).

Port Configuration

Port No :

The switch port number of the port.

Enable :

Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port

Action :

Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port. Valid values are Shutdown Port,

Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only.

Tx Mode :

Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU's, or whether it is just passively

looking for looped PDU's.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

118 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

118 118

2-8 Spanning Tree

The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to

provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows the switch to interact

with other bridging devices (that is, an STP-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your network

to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide

backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down.

STP - STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device (STP- compliant switch,

bridge or router) that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It selects a root port on

each bridging device (except for the root device) which incurs the lowest path cost when

forwarding a packet from that device to the root device. Then it selects a designated bridging

device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that

LAN to the root device. All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as

designated ports. After determining the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and

designated ports, and disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded

between root ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.

Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs

(Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root Bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello

BPDU after a predefined interval (Maximum Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the Root

Bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the

network to reestablish a valid network topology.

2-8.1 Bridge Setting

The section describes that how to configure the Spanning Tree Bridge and STP System settings.

It allows you to configure STP System settings are used by all STP Bridge instance in the switch.

Web Interface

To configure the Spanning Tree Bridge Settings parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Spanning Tree, Bridge Settings.

2. Scroll to select the parameters and write down available value of parameters in blank field

in Basic Settings.

3. Evoke to enable or disable the parameters and write down available value of parameters in

blank field in Advanced settings.

4. Click the apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

119 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

119 119

Figure 2-8.1: The STP Bridge Configuration

Parameter description:

Basic Settings

Protocol Version :

The MSTP / RSTP / STP protocol version setting. Valid values are STP, RSTP and MSTP.

Bridge Priority :

Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority

plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch

forms a Bridge Identifier. For MSTP operation, this is the priority of the CIST. Otherwise, this

is the priority of the STP/RSTP Bridge.

Forward Delay :

The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding (used in

STP compatible mode). Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds.

Max Age :

The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge.

Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds, and MaxAge must be <= (FwdDelay-1)*2.

Maximum Hop Count :

120 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

120 120

This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the

boundary of an MSTI region. It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its

BPDU information to. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops.

Transmit Hold Count :

The number of BPDU's a bridge port can send per second. When exceeded, transmission of

the next BPDU will be delayed. Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU's per second.

Advanced Settings

Edge Port BPDU Filtering :

Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs.

Edge Port BPDU Guard :

Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a

BPDU. The port will enter the error-disabled state, and will be removed from the active

topology.

Port Error Recovery :

Control whether a port in the error-disabled state automatically will be enabled after a

certain time. If recovery is not enabled, ports have to be disabled and re-enabled for normal

STP operation. The condition is also cleared by a system reboot.

Port Error Recovery Timeout :

The time to pass before a port in the error-disabled state can be enabled. Valid values are

between 30 and 86400 seconds (24 hours).

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

121 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

121 121

2-8.2 MSTI Mapping

When you implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance. The

CIST is not available for explicit mapping, as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped.

Due to the reason that you need to set the list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI. The VLANs must

be separated with comma and/or space. A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI. An unused

MSTI should just be left empty. (I.e. not having any VLANs mapped to it.)

This section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority

configurations, and possibly change them as well.

Web Interface

To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Spanning Tree, MSTI Mapping.

2. Specify the configuration identification parameters in the field. Specify the VLANs Mapped

blank field.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-8.2: The MSTI Configuration

122 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

122 122

Parameter description:

Configuration Identification

Configuration Name :

The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping. Bridges must share the name and revision

(see below), as well as the VLAN-to-MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning

trees for MSTI's (Intra-region). The name is at most 32 characters.

Configuration Revision :

The revision of the MSTI configuration named above. This must be an integer between 0

and 65535.

MSTI Mapping

MSTI :

The bridge instance. The CIST is not available for explicit mapping, as it will receive the

VLANs not explicitly mapped.

VLANs Mapped :

The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI. The VLANs can be given as a single (xx, xx being

between 1 and 4094) VLAN, or a range (xx-yy), each of which must be separated with

comma and/or space. A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI. An unused MSTI should

just be left empty. (I.e. not having any VLANs mapped to it.) Example: 2,5,20-40.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

123 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

123 123

2-8.3 MSTI Priorities

When you implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance. The

CIST is the default instance which is always active. For controls the bridge priority. Lower

numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number,

concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier

The section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority

configurations, and possibly change them as well.

Web Interface

To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Spanning Tree, MSTI Priorities.

2. Scroll the Priority.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-8.3: The MSTI Configuration

Parameter description:

MSTI :

The bridge instance. The CIST is the default instance, which is always active.

Priority :

Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority

plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch

forms a Bridge Identifier.

124 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

124 124

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

125 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

125 125

2-8.4 CIST Ports

When you implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance. You

need to configure the CIST Ports. The section describes it allows the user to inspect the current

STP CIST port configurations, and possibly change them as well. This page contains settings for

physical and aggregated ports.

Web Interface

To configure the Spanning Tree CIST Ports parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Spanning Tree, CIST Ports.

2. Scroll and evoke to set all parameters of CIST Aggregated Port Configuration.

3. Evoke to enable or disable the STP, then scroll and evoke to set all parameters of the CIST

normal Port configuration.

4. Click the apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-8.4: The STP CIST Port Configuration

Parameter description:

Port :

The switch port number of the logical STP port.

STP Enabled :

Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port. This field will be read only if Voice

VLAN feature is enabled. The Voice VLAN port mode will be read only if this field be

Enabled.

Path Cost :

Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost as

126 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

126 126

appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the

Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when

establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as

forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to

200000000.

Priority :

Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port

cost. (See above).

operEdge (state flag) :

Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices. (No

Bridges attached). Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports (having

operEdge true) than for other ports.The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and

AutoEdge fields. This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor->Spanning Tree -> STP Detailed

Bridge Status.

AdminEdge :

Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared. (The initial operEdge state

when a port is initialized).

AutoEdge :

Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port.

This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU's are received on the port or not.

Restricted Role :

If enabled, causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI, even if it

has the best spanning tree priority vector. Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port

after the Root Port has been selected. If set, it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity. It

can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the

network influence the spanning tree active topology, possibly because those bridges are not

under the full control of the administrator. This feature is also known as Root Guard.

Restricted TCN :

If enabled, causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and

topology changes to other ports. If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after

changes in a spanning tree's active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned

station location information. It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external

to a core region of the network, causing address flushing in that region, possibly because

those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of

the attached LANs transits frequently.

BPDU Guard :

If enabled, causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU's. Contrary to the

similar bridge setting, the port Edge status does not affect this setting. A port entering

error-disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as

well.

Point to Point

Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather than to a shared medium.

This can be automatically determined, or forced either true or false. Transition to the

forwarding state is faster for point-to-point LANs than for shared media.

Buttons

Apply :

127 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

127 127

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

128 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

128 128

2-8.5 MSTI Ports

The section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations,

and possibly change them as well.

An MSTI port is a virtual port, which is instantiated separately for each active CIST (physical)

port for each MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port. The MSTI instance must

be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options. It contains MSTI port

settings for physical and aggregated ports.

Web Interface

To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Port Configuration parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Spanning Tree, MSTI Ports

2. Scroll to select the MST1 or other MSTI Port

3. Click Get to set the detail parameters of the MSTI Ports.

4. Scroll to set all parameters of the MSTI Port configuration.

5. Click the save to save the setting

6. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values

Figure 2-8.5: The MSTI Port Configuration

Parameter description:

Port :

129 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

129 129

The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST (and MSTI) port.

Path Cost :

Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost as

appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using the

Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when

establishing the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as

forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to

200000000.

Priority :

Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port

cost. (See above).

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

130 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

130 130

2-9 IPMC Profile

This page provides IPMC Profile related configurations.

2-9.1 Profile Table

The IPMC profile is used to deploy the access control on IP multicast streams. It is allowed to

create at maximum 64 Profiles with at maximum 128 corresponding rules for each.

Web Interface

To configure the IPMC Profile Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, IPMC Profile and Profile Table.

2. Select Enabled in the Mode of Global Profile Mode.

3. Click Add New IPMC Profile.

4. Specify the IPMC Profile Table Setting parameters in the field. Specify the Profile Name and

Profile Description blank field.

5. Click Apply.

6. Click the button to specify IPMC Profile Rule Settings.

7. Click Add Last Rule and can manage the rules.

131 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

131 131

Figure 2-9.1: The IPMC Profile Configuration

Parameter description:

Global Profile Mode :

Enable/Disable the Global IPMC Profile.

System starts to do filtering based on profile settings only when the global profile mode is

enabled.

Delete :

Check to delete the entry.

The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.

Profile Name :

The name used for indexing the profile table.

Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic and

numeric characters. At least one alphabet must be present.

Profile Description :

Additional description, which is composed of at maximum 64 alphabetic and numeric

characters, about the profile.

No blank or space characters are permitted as part of description. Use "_" or "-" to separate

the description sentence.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

132 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

132 132

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Add New IPMC Profile :

Click to add new IPMC profile. Specify the name and configure the new entry. Click "Save".

Rule :

When the profile is created, click the edit button to enter the rule setting page of the

designated profile. Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking the view

button. You can manage or inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the following

buttons:

: List the rules associated with the designated profile.

: Adjust the rules associated with the designated profile.

IPMC Profile Rule Settings Table

This page provides the filtering rule settings for a specific IPMC profile. It displays the

configured rule entries in precedence order. First rule entry has highest priority in lookup,

while the last rule entry has lowest priority in lookup.

Profile Name :

The name of the designated profile to be associated. This field is not editable.

Entry Name :

The name used in specifying the address range used for this rule.

Only the existing profile address entries will be chosen in the selected box. This field is not

allowed to be selected as none ("-") while the Rule Settings Table is committed.

Address Range :

The corresponding address range of the selected profile entry. This field is not editable and

will be adjusted automatically according to the selected profile entry.

Action :

Indicates the learning action upon receiving the Join/Report frame that has the group

address matches the address range of the rule.

Permit: Group address matches the range specified in the rule will be learned.

Deny: Group address matches the range specified in the rule will be dropped.

Log :

Indicates the logging preference upon receiving the Join/Report frame that has the group

address matches the address range of the rule.

Enable: Corresponding information of the group address, that matches the range specified

in the rule, will be logged.

Disable: Corresponding information of the group address, that matches the range specified

in the rule, will not be logged.

Buttons

Add Last Rule

Click to add a new rule in the end of the specific profile's rule list. Specify the address entry

and configure the new entry. Click "Commit"

Commit

Click to commit rule changes for the designated profile.

Reset

133 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

133 133

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Rule Management Buttons :

You can manage rules and the corresponding precedence order by using the following

buttons:

: Insert a new rule before the current entry of rule.

: Delete the current entry of rule.

: Moves the current entry of rule up in the list.

: Moves the current entry of rule down in the list.

2-9.2 Address Entry

This page provides address range settings used in IPMC profile.

The address entry is used to specify the address range that will be associated with IPMC Profile.

It is allowed to create at maximum 128 address entries in the system.

Web Interface

To configure the IPMC Profile Address Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, IPMC Profile and Address Entry.

2. Click Add New Address (Range) Entry.

3. Specify the IPMC Profile Address Configuration parameters in the field. Specify the Entry

Name and Start Address and End Address blank field.

4. Click Apply.

Figure 2-9.2: The IPMC Profile Address Configuration

Parameter description:

134 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

134 134

Entry Name :

The name used for indexing the address entry table.

Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximun 16 alphabetic and

numeric characters. At least one alphabet must be present.

Start Address :

The starting IPv4/IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range.

End Address :

The ending IPv4/IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Delete :

Check to delete the entry.

The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.

Add New Address (Range) Entry :

Click to add new address range. Specify the name and configure the addresses. Click "Save"

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

<< :

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address Configuration.

>> :

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

135 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

135 135

2-10 MVR

The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLANs.

In a multicast television application, a PC or a network television or a set-top box can receive the

multicast stream. Multiple set-top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port, which is

a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port. When a subscriber selects a channel, the

set-top box or PC sends an IGMP/MLD report message to Switch A to join the appropriate

multicast group address. Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the

multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports.

It is allowed to create at maximum 4 MVR VLANs with corresponding channel profile for each

Multicast VLAN.

The channel profile is defined by the IPMC Profile which provides the filtering conditions.

Web Interface

To configure the MVR Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, MVR.

2. Scroll the MVR mode to enable or disable and Scroll to set all parameters.

3. Click the save to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-10: The MVR Configuration

136 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

136 136

Parameter description:

MVR Mode :

Enable/Disable the Global MVR.

The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current configuration in IGMP/MLD

Snooping. It is suggested to enable Unregistered Flooding control when the MVR group

table is full.

MVR VID :

Specify the Multicast VLAN ID.

Be Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management

VLAN ports.

MVR Name :

MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVR VLAN.

Maximum length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 32. MVR VLAN Name can only contain

alphabets or numbers. When the optional MVR VLAN name is given, it should contain at

least one alphabet. MVR VLAN name can be edited for the existing MVR VLAN entries or it

can be added to the new entries.

IGMP Address :

Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP control frames.

The default IGMP address is not set (0.0.0.0).

When the IGMP address is not set, system uses IPv4 management address of the IP

interface associated with this VLAN.

When the IPv4 management address is not set, system uses the first available IPv4

management address.

Otherwise, system uses a pre-defined value. By default, this value will be 192.0.2.1.

Mode :

Specify the MVR mode of operation. In Dynamic mode, MVR allows dynamic MVR

membership reports on source ports. In Compatible mode, MVR membership reports are

forbidden on source ports. The default is Dynamic mode.

Tagging :

Specify whether the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent as Untagged or

Tagged with MVR VID. The default is tagged.

Priority :

Specify how the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent in prioritized manner. The

default Priority is 0.

LLQI :

Define the maximum time to wait for IGMP/MLD report memberships on a receiver port

before removing the port from multicast group membership. The value is in units of tenths

of a seconds. The range is from 0 to 31744. The default LLQI is 5 tenths or one-half second.

Interface Channel Setting :

When the MVR VLAN is created, click the Edit symbol to expand the corresponding

multicast channel settings for the specific MVR VLAN. Summary about the Interface Channel

Setting (of the MVR VLAN) will be shown besides the Edit symbol.

Profile Management Button :

You can inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the following button:

137 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

137 137

Navigate: List the rules associated with the designated profile.

Port :

The logical port for the settings.

Port Role :

Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following roles.

Inactive: The designated port does not participate MVR operations.

Source: Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast data as source ports.

Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports.

Receiver: Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and should only receive

multicast data. It does not receive data unless it becomes a member of the multicast group

by issuing IGMP/MLD messages.

Be Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management

VLAN ports. Select the port role by clicking the Role symbol to switch the setting. I indicates

Inactive; S indicates Source; R indicates Receiver. The default Role is Inactive.

Immediate Leave :

Enable the fast leave on the port.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Delete :

Check to delete the entry.

The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.

Add New MVR VLAN :

Click to add new MVR VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry. Click "Apply".

138 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

138 138

2-11 IPMC

2-11.1 IGMP Snooping

The function, is used to establish the multicast groups to forward the multicast packet to the

member ports, and, in nature, avoids wasting the bandwidth while IP multicast packets are

running over the network. This is because a switch that does not support IGMP or IGMP

Snooping cannot tell the multicast packet from the broadcast packet, so it can only treat them

all as the broadcast packet. Without IGMP Snooping, the multicast packet forwarding function

is plain and nothing is different from broadcast packet.

A switch supported IGMP Snooping with the functions of query, report and leave, a type of

packet exchanged between IP Multicast Router/Switch and IP Multicast Host, can update the

information of the Multicast table when a member (port) joins or leaves an IP Multicast

Destination Address. With this function, once a switch receives an IP multicast packet, it will

forward the packet to the members who joined in a specified IP multicast group before.

The packets will be discarded by the IGMP Snooping if the user transmits multicast packets to

the multicast group that had not been built up in advance. IGMP mode enables the switch to

issue IGMP function that you enable IGMP proxy or snooping on the switch, which connects to

a router closer to the root of the tree. This interface is the upstream interface. The router on the

upstream interface should be running IGMP.

It can support up to 1024 multicast groups.

2-11.1.1 Basic Configuration

This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration.

Web Interface

To configure the IGMP Snooping Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, IPMC, IGMP Snooping, Basic Configuration.

2. Evoke to select enable or disable the parameter in the Global Configuration and Port

Related Configuration Mode.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

139 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

139 139

Figure 2-11.1.1: The IGMP Snooping Configuration.

Parameter description:

Snooping Enabled :

Enable the Global IGMP Snooping.

Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled :

Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding.

The flooding control takes effect only when IGMP Snooping is enabled.

When IGMP Snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding is always active in

spite of this setting.

IGMP SSM Range :

SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run the SSM

service model for the groups in the address range.

Leave Proxy Enabled :

Enable IGMP Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave

messages to the router side.

Proxy Enabled :

Enable IGMP Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave

messages to the router side.

Router Port :

Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that

leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.

If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act as

a router port.

140 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

140 140

Fast Leave :

Enable the fast leave on the port.

Throttling :

Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

141 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

141 141

2-11.1.2 VLAN Configuration

The section describes the VLAN configuration setting process integrated with IGMP Snooping

function. For each setting page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20,

selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show

the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one

with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table. The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to

select the starting point in the VLAN Table. Clicking the button will update the displayed table

starting from that or the next closest VLAN Table match.

Web Interface

To configure the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, IPMC, IGMP Snooping and VLAN Configuration.

2. Click Add New IGMP VLAN.

3. Evoke to select enable or disable Snooping, Querier Address. Specify the parameters in the

blank field.

4. Click the refresh to update the data or click << or > to display previous entry or next entry.

5. Click the Apply to save the setting

6. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values

Figure 2-11.1.2: The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration.

Parameter description:

VLAN ID :

It displays the VLAN ID of the entry.

IGMP Snooping Enabled :

Enable the per-VLAN IGMP Snooping. Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected. .

142 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

142 142

Querier Election :

Enable to join IGMP Querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as an IGMP Non-Querier.

Querier Address :

Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP Querier election.

When the Querier address is not set, system uses IPv4 management address of the IP

interface associated with this VLAN.

When the IPv4 management address is not set, system uses the first available IPv4

management address.

Otherwise, system uses a pre-defined value. By default, this value will be 192.0.2.1.

Compatibility :

Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on

the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network. The allowed selection

is IGMP-Auto, Forced IGMPv1, Forced IGMPv2, Forced IGMPv3, default compatibility value is

IGMP-Auto.

PRI :

Priority of Interface.

It indicates the IGMP control frame priority level generated by the system. These values can

be used to prioritize different classes of traffic.

The allowed range is 0 (best effort) to 7 (highest), default interface priority value is 0.

RV :

Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on

a network. The allowed range is 1 to 255; default robustness variable value is 2.

QI :

Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the

Querier. The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds; default query interval is 125 seconds.

QRI :

Query Response Interval. The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code

inserted into the periodic General Queries. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of

seconds; default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).

LLQI (LMQI for IGMP) :

Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by

the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last Member Query Count. The allowed

range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds; default last member query interval is 10 in tenths

of seconds (1 second).

URI :

Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions

of a host's initial report of membership in a group. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds,

default unsolicited report interval is 1 second. .

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

143 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

143 143

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.

Add New IGMP VLAN :

Click to add new IGMP VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry. Click "Apply".

The specific IGMP VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created..

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

<< :

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the

lowest VLAN ID.

> :

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

144 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

144 144

2-11.1.3 Port Filtering Profile

The section describes how to set the IGMP Port Group Filtering with the IGMP filtering feature,

a user can exert this type of control. In some network Application environments, as like the

metropolitan or multiple-dwelling unit (MDU) installations, a user might want to control the

multicast groups to which a user on a switch port can belong. It allows the user to control the

distribution of multicast services, such as IP/TV, based on some type of subscription or service

plan.

With this feature, you can filter multicast joins on a per-port basis by configuring IP multicast

profiles and associating them with individual switch ports. An IGMP profile can contain one or

more multicast groups and specifies whether access to the group is permitted or denied. If an

IGMP profile denying access to a multicast group is applied to a switch port, the IGMP join

report requesting the stream of IP multicast traffic is dropped, and the port is not allowed to

receive IP multicast traffic from that group. If the filtering action permits access to the multicast

group, the IGMP report from the port is forwarded for normal processing.

IGMP filtering controls only IGMP membership join reports and has no relationship to the

function that directs the forwarding of IP multicast traffic.

Web Interface

To configure the IGMP Snooping Port Filtering Profile Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, IPMC, IGMP Snooping and Port Filtering Profile.

2. Scroll the Port to enable the Port Group Filtering. Specify the Filtering Groups in the blank

field.

3. Click the apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-11.1.3: The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Profile.

Parameter description:

Port :

The logical port for the settings.

Filtering Profile :

Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port. Summary about the

145 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

145 145

designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button.

Profile Management Button :

You can inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the following button:

: List the rules associated with the designated profile.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

146 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

146 146

2-11.2 MLD Snooping

Curiously enough, a network node that acts as a source of IPv6 multicast traffic is only an

indirect participant in MLD snoopingit just provides multicast traffic, and MLD doesnt

interact with it. (Note, however, that in an application like desktop conferencing a network

node may act as both a source and an MLD host; but MLD interacts with that node only in its

role as an MLD host.)

A source node creates multicast traffic by sending packets to a multicast address. In IPv6,

addresses with the first eight bits set (that is, FF as the first two characters of the address) are

multicast addresses, and any node that listens to such an address will receive the traffic sent to

that address. Application software running on the source and destination systems cooperates

to determine what multicast address to use. (Note that this is a function of the application

software, not of MLD.)

When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN, the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast

traffic. If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address, it forwards

that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address. It drops that traffic

for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts

2-11.2.1 Basic Configuration

The section will let you understand how to configure the MLD Snooping basic configuration

and the parameters.

Web Interface

To configure the MLD Snooping Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, IPMC, MLD Snooping and Basic Configuration.

2. Evoke to enable or disable the Global configuration parameters. Evoke the port to join

Router port and Fast Leave.

3. Scroll to select the Throttling mode with unlimited or 1 to 10.

4. Click apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

147 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

147 147

previously saved values.

Figure 2-11.2.1: The MLD Snooping Configuration.

Parameter description:

Snooping Enabled :

Enable the Global MLD Snooping.

Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding enabled :

Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding.

The flooding control takes effect only when MLD Snooping is enabled.

When MLD Snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding is always active in

spite of this setting.

MLD SSM Range :

SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run the SSM

service model for the groups in the address (Using IPv6 Address) range.

Leave Proxy Enabled :

Enable MLD Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave

messages to the router side.

Proxy Enabled :

Enable MLD Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave

messages to the router side.

Fast Leave :

To evoke to enable the fast leave on the port.

148 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

148 148

Router Port :

Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that

leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier. If an aggregation member port is

selected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act as a router port.

Throttling :

Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

149 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

149 149

2-11.2.2 VLAN Configuration

When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN, the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast

traffic. If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address, it forwards

that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address. It drops that traffic

for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts

The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup. When

the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the button

to start over.

Web Interface

To configure the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, IPMC, MLD Snooping and VLAN Configuration.

2. Specify the VLAN ID with entries per page.

3. Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Information.

4. Click << or > to move to previous or next entry.

Figure 2-11.2.2: The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration.

Parameter description:

VLAN ID :

It displays the VLAN ID of the entry.

MLD Snooping Enabled :

Enable the per-VLAN MLD Snooping. Up to 32 VLANs can be selected for MLD Snooping.

Querier Election :

Enable to join MLD Querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as a MLD Non-Querier.

Compatibility :

Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on

the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network.

The allowed selection is MLD-Auto, Forced MLDv1, default compatibility value is MLD-Auto.

PRI :

Priority of Interface.

It indicates the MLD control frame priority level generated by the system. These values can

150 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

150 150

be used to prioritize different classes of traffic.

The allowed range is 0 (best effort) to 7 (highest), default interface priority value is 0.

RV :

Robustness Variable.

The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a link.

The allowed range is 1 to 255, default robustness variable value is 2.

QI :

Query Interval.

The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier.

The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds, default query interval is 125 seconds.

QRI :

Query Response Interval.

The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into

the periodic General Queries.

The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default query response interval is 100

in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).

LLQI :

Last Listener Query Interval.

The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the

Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response

to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages. It is also the Maximum Response Delay used

to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source

Specific Query messages.

The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds, default last listener query interval is 10

in tenths of seconds (1 second).

URI :

Unsolicited Report Interval.

The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node's initial report of

interest in a multicast address.

The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds, default unsolicited report interval is 1 second.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.

Add New MLD VLAN :

Click to add new MLD VLAN. Specify the VID and configure the new entry. Click "Apply". The

specific MLD VLAN starts working after the corresponding static VLAN is also created.

151 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

151 151

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

<< :

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the

lowest VLAN ID.

> :

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

152 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

152 152

2-11.2.3 Port Filtering Profile

The section describes that you could to set the Port Group Filtering in the MLD Snooping

function. On the UI that you could add new filtering group and safety policy.

Web Interface

To configure the Port Filtering Profilein the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, IPMC, MLD Snooping and Port Filtering Profile.

2. Scroll the Port to enable the Port Group Filtering. Specify the Filtering Groups in the blank

field.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-11.2.3: The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration

Parameter description:

Port :

The logical port for the settings.

Filtering Profile :

Select the IPMC Profile as the filtering condition for the specific port. Summary about the

designated profile will be shown by clicking the view button.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Profile Management Button :

You can inspect the rules of the designated profile by using the following button:

153 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

153 153

: List the rules associated with the designated profile.

2-12 LLDP

The switch supports the LLDP. For current information on your switch model, The Link Layer

Discovery Protocol (LLDP) provides a standards-based method for enabling switches to

advertise themselves to adjacent devices and to learn about adjacent LLDP devices. The Link

Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a vendor-neutral Link Layer protocol in the Internet Protocol

Suite used by network devices for advertising their identity, capabilities, and neighbors on a

IEEE 802 local area network, principally wired Ethernet. The protocol is formally referred to by

the IEEE as Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery specified in standards

document IEEE 802.1AB.

2-12.1 LLDP

You can per port to do the LLDP configuration and the detail parameters, the settings will take

effect immediately. This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port

settings.

Web Interface

To configure the LLDPin the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, LLDP and LLDP.

2. Modify LLDP parameters

3. Set the required mode for transmitting or receiving LLDP messages

4. Specify the information to include in the TLV field of advertised messages

5. Click the Apply to save the setting.

6. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

154 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

154 154

Figure 2-12.1: The LLDP Configuration

Parameter description:

LLDP Parameters

Tx Interval :

The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbours for having the network

discovery information up-to-date. The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by

the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 5 - 32768 seconds.

Tx Hold :

Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame

shall be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by

Tx Interval seconds. Valid values are restricted to 2 - 10 times.

Tx Delay :

If some configuration is changed (e.g. the IP address) a new LLDP frame is transmitted, but

the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds. Tx

Delay cannot be larger than 1/4 of the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 1 -

8192 seconds.

Tx Reinit :

When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted, an LLDP shutdown

frame is transmitted to the neighboring units, signaling that the LLDP information isn't valid

anymore. Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new

LLDP initialization. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 10 seconds.

LLDP Port Configuration

Port :

The switch port number of the logical LLDP port.

Mode :

Select LLDP mode.

Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information, but LLDP information from neighbor

units is analyzed.

155 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

155 155

Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors, but will send out

LLDP information.

Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information, and will drop LLDP information

received from neighbors.

Enabled the switch will send out LLDP information, and will analyze LLDP information

received from neighbors.

CDP Aware :

Select CDP awareness.

The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames (The switch doesn't

transmit CDP frames). CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled.

Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors table

are decoded. All other TLVs are discarded (Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP

frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics.). CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbors

table as shown below.

CDP TLV "Device ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Chassis ID" field.

CDP TLV "Address" is mapped to the LLDP "Management Address" field. The CDP address

TLV can contain multiple addresses, but only the first address is shown in the LLDP

neighbors table.

CDP TLV "Port ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Port ID" field.

CDP TLV "Version and Platform" is mapped to the LLDP "System Description" field.

Both the CDP and LLDP support "system capabilities", but the CDP capabilities cover

capabilities that are not part of the LLDP. These capabilities are shown as "others" in the

LLDP neighbors table.

If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from

neighbor devices. If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are

terminated by the switch.

NOTE: When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP

information isn't removed immediately, but gets when the hold time

is exceeded.

Port Descr :

Optional TLV: When checked the "port description" is included in LLDP information

transmitted.

Sys Name :

Optional TLV: When checked the "system name" is included in LLDP information transmitted.

Sys Descr :

Optional TLV: When checked the "system description" is included in LLDP information

transmitted.

Sys Capa :

Optional TLV: When checked the "system capability" is included in LLDP information

transmitted.

Mgmt Addr :

156 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

156 156

Optional TLV: When checked the "management address" is included in LLDP information

transmitted.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

157 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

157 157

2-12.2 LLDP-MED

Media Endpoint Discovery is an enhancement of LLDP, known as LLDP-MED that provides the

following facilities:

Auto-discovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 Priority and Differentiated services

(Diffserv) settings) enabling plug and play networking.

Device location discovery to allow creation of location databases and, in the case of Voice over

Internet Protocol (VoIP), Enhanced 911 services.

Inventory management, allowing network administrators to track their network devices, and

determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions, and serial or

asset number).

This page allows you to configure the LLDP-MED. This function applies to VoIP devices which

support LLDP-MED.

Web Interface

To configure the LLDP-MEDin the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, LLDP and LLDP-MED Configuration.

2. Modify Fast start repeat count parameter, default is 4

3. Modify Coordinates Location parameters

4. Fill Civic Address Location parameters

5. Add new policy

6. Click Apply, will show following Policy Port Configuration

7. Select Policy ID for each port

8. Click the Apply to save the setting.

9. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

158 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

158 158

Figure 2-12.2: The LLDP-MED Configuration

Parameter description:

Fast start repeat count

Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a

critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general. In addition, it is best to advertise only

those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types (for

example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice-capable devices), both

in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity

issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy.

With this in mind LLDP-MED defines an LLDP-MED Fast Start interaction between the

protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol, in order to achieve these related

properties. Initially, a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an

LLDPDU. Only after an LLDP-MED Endpoint Device is detected, will an LLDP-MED capable

Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP-MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the

associated port. The LLDP-MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of

the LLDPDU to start within a second, when a new LLDP-MED neighbor has been detected in

order share LLDP-MED information as fast as possible to new neighbors.

Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbors,

it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the

possibility of the neighbors receiving the LLDP frame. With Fast start repeat count it is

159 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

159 159

possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated. The

recommended value is 4 times, given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be

transmitted, when an LLDP frame with new information is received.

It should be noted that LLDP-MED and the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended

to run on links between LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices,

and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements, including

Network Connectivity Devices, or other types of links.

Coordinates Location

Latitude :

Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits.

It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator.

Longitude :

Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits.

It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the

prime meridian.

Altitude :

Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within -32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits.

It is possible to select between two altitude types (floors or meters).

Meters: Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified.

Floors: Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different

floor-to-floor dimensions. An altitude = 0.0 is meaningful even outside a building, and

represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude. Inside a building, 0.0 represents

the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance.

Map Datum :

The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options:

WGS84: (Geographical 3D) - World Geodesic System 1984, CRS Code 4327, and Prime

Meridian Name: Greenwich.

NAD83/NAVD88: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name:

Greenwich; the associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988

(NAVD88). This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land, not near tidal

water (which would use Datum = NAD83/MLLW).

NAD83/MLLW: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name:

Greenwich; the associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water (MLLW). This datum pair

is to be used when referencing locations on water/sea/ocean.

Civic Address Location

IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information (Civic Address LCI).

Country code :

The two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters - Example: DK, DE or US.

State :

National subdivisions (state, canton, region, province, prefecture).

County :

160 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

160 160

County, parish, gun (Japan), district.

City :

City, township, shi (Japan) - Example: Copenhagen.

City district :

City division, borough, city district, ward, chou (Japan).

Block (Neighbourhood) :

Neighbourhood, block.

Street :

Street - Example: Poppelvej.

Leading street direction :

Leading street direction - Example: N.

Trailing street suffix :

Trailing street suffix - Example: SW.

Street suffix :

Street suffix - Example: Ave, Platz.

House no. :

House number - Example: 21.

House no. suffix :

House number suffix - Example: A, 1/2.

Landmark :

Landmark or vanity address - Example: Columbia University.

Additional location info :

Additional location info - Example: South Wing.

Name :

Name (residence and office occupant) - Example: Flemming Jahn.

Zip code :

Postal/zip code - Example: 2791.

Building :

Building (structure) - Example: Low Library.

Apartment :

Unit (Apartment, suite) - Example: Apt 42.

Floor :

Floor - Example: 4.

Room no. :

Room number - Example: 450F.

Place type :

Place type - Example: Office.

Postal community name :

161 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

161 161

Postal community name - Example: Leonia.

P.O. Box :

Post office box (P.O. BOX) - Example: 12345.

Additional code :

Additional code - Example: 1320300003.

Emergency Call Service

Emergency Call Service (e.g. E911 and others), such as defined by TIA or NENA.

Emergency Call Service :

Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as

used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. This

format consists of a numerical digit string, corresponding to the ELIN to be used for

emergency calling.

Policies

Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues

with the VLAN configuration, along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes, which

apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port. Improper network policy

configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in

voice quality degradation or loss of service.

Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific 'real-time' network

policy requirements, such as interactive voice and/or video services.

The network policy attributes advertised are:

1. Layer 2 VLAN ID (IEEE 802.1Q-2003)

2. Layer 2 priority value (IEEE 802.1D-2004)

3. Layer 3 Diffserv code point (DSCP) value (IETF RFC 2474)

This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application

types supported on a given port. The application types specifically addressed are:

1. Voice

2. Guest Voice

3. Softphone Voice

4. Video Conferencing

5. Streaming Video

6. Control / Signalling (conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types

above)

A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization, and

different policies per application type. LLDP-MED allows multiple policies to be advertised

per port, each corresponding to a different application type. Different ports on the same

Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies, based on the

authenticated user identity or port configuration.

It should be noted that LLDP-MED is not intended to run on links other than between

Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints, and therefore does not need to advertise the

multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN.

162 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

162 162

Policy ID :

ID for the policy. This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that

shall be mapped to the specific ports.

Application Type :

Intended use of the application types:

1. Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances

supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate

VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.

2. Voice Signalling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a different

policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media. This application type should not be

advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application

policy.

3. Guest Voice - support a separate 'limited feature-set' voice service for guest users and

visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting

interactive voice services.

4. Guest Voice Signalling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a

different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media. This

application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those

advertised in the Guest Voice application policy.

5. Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such

as PCs or laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs, if at

all, and are typically configured to use an 'untagged' VLAN or a single 'tagged' data specific

VLAN. When a network policy is defined for use with an 'untagged' VLAN (see Tagged flag

below), then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.

6. Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other

similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.

7. Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and

other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network

policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended

use of this application type.

8. Video Signalling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a separate

policy for the video signalling than for the video media. This application type should not be

advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video

Conferencing application policy.

Tag :

Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a 'tagged' or an 'untagged'

VLAN.

Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not

include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003. In this case, both the VLAN ID and the

Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.

Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format, and that

both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used, as well as the DSCP value.

The tagged format includes an additional field, known as the tag header. The tagged frame

format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.

VLAN ID :

VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003.

163 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

163 163

L2 Priority :

L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. L2 Priority may

specify one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined by IEEE 802.1D-2004. A value of

0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802.1D-2004.

DSCP :

DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behaviour for the specified application type

as defined in IETF RFC 2474. DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values (0 through 63).

A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475.

Adding a new policy :

Click to add a new policy. Specify the Application type, Tag, VLAN ID, L2 Priority and DSCP

for the new policy. Click "Save".

Port Policies Configuration

Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the

same network policies, based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration.

Port :

The port number to which the configuration applies.

Policy ID :

The set of policies that shall apply to a given port. The set of policies is selected by check

marking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Delete

Check to delete the policy. It will be deleted during the next save

164 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

164 164

2-13 PoE

PoE is an acronym for Power over Ethernet.

Power over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power, to remote devices over standard

Ethernet cable. It could for example be used for powering IP telephones, wireless LAN access

points and other equipment, where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the

equipment to main power supply.

The PoE detect function is follow the table

Stages of Powering up a PoE Link

Stage Action Volts specified

[V]

802.3af 802.3at

Detection PSE detects if the PD has the correct

signature resistance of 1926.5 k

2.7-10.1

Classification PSE detects resistor indicating power

range

14.5-20.5

Mark 1 Signals PSE is 802.3at capable. PD

presents a 0.254 mA load. 7-10

Class 2 PSE outputs classification voltage

again to indicate 802.3at capability 14.5-20.5

Mark 2 Signals PSE is 802.3at capable. PD

presents a 0.254 mA load. 7-10

Startup Startup voltage >42 >42

Normal

operation

Supply power to device 37-45 42.5-57

Power levels available

Class Usage Power

range

[Watt]

Class description

0 Default 15.4 Classification

unimplemented

1 Optional 4 Very Low power

2 Optional 7 Low power

3 Optional 15.4 Mid power

4 Valid for 802.3at (Type

2) devices, not allowed

for 802.3af devices

30 High power

165 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

165 165

2-13.1 Configuration

This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings and show all

PoE Supply W.

Web Interface

To configure Power over Ethernet in the web interface:

1. Click configuration, PoE, and configuration

2. Specify the Reserved Power determined and Power Management ode. Specify the PoE or

PoE+ and Priority.

3. Click Apply.

Figure 2-13.1: The PoE Configuration

Parameter description:

Power Over Ethernet Configuration

Reserved Power determined by :

There are three modes for configuring how the ports/PDs may reserve power.

1. Allocated mode: In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may

reserve. The allocated/reserved power for each port/PD is specified in the Maximum Power

fields.

2. Class mode: In this mode each port automatically determines how much power to reserve

according to the class the connected PD belongs to, and reserves the power accordingly.

166 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

166 166

Four different port classes exist and one for 4, 7, 15.4 or 30 Watts. In this mode the

Maximum Power fields have no effect.

3. LLDP-MED mode: This mode is similar to the Class mode expect that each port determine

the amount power it reserves by exchanging PoE information using the LLDP protocol and

reserves power accordingly. If no LLDP information is available for a port, the port will

reserve power using the class mode In this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect

for all modes: If a port uses more power than the reserved power for the port, the port is

shut down.

Power Management Mode :

There are 2 modes for configuring when to shut down the ports:

1. Actual Consumption: In this mode the ports are shut down when the actual power

consumption for all ports exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver or

if the actual power consumption for a given port exceeds the reserved power for that port.

The ports are shut down according to the ports priority. If two ports have the same priority

the port with the highest port number is shut down.

2. Reserved Power: In this mode the ports are shut down when total reserved powered

exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver. In this mode the port

power is not turned on if the PD requests more power than available from the power supply.

Power Supply Configuration

Primary and Backup Power Source :

Some switches support having two PoE power supplies. One is used as primary power

source, and one as backup power source. If the switch doesn't support backup power supply

only the primary power supply settings will be shown. In case that the primary power source

fails the backup power source will take over. For being able to determine the amount of

power the PD may use, it must be defined what amount of power the primary and backup

power sources can deliver.

Valid values are in the range 0 to 2000 Watts.

Port Configuration

Port :

This is the logical port number for this row.

Ports that are not PoE-capable are grayed out and thus impossible to configure PoE for.

PoE Mode :

The PoE Mode represents the PoE operating mode for the port.

Disabled: PoE disabled for the port.

PoE : Enables PoE IEEE 802.3af (Class 4 PDs limited to 15.4W)

PoE+ : Enables PoE+ IEEE 802.3at (Class 4 PDs limited to 30W)

PoE Schedule :

The Poe Schedule is defined by Schedule Profile. User can define the profiles for the

scheduling.

Priority :

The Priority represents the ports priority. There are three levels of power priority named Low,

High and Critical.

The priority is used in the case where the remote devices requires more power than the

power supply can deliver. In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turn off

167 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

167 167

starting from the port with the highest port number.

Maximum Power :

The Maximum Power value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in

watts that can be delivered to a remote device.

The maximum allowed value is 30 W.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

168 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

168 168

2-13.2 Power Delay

This page allows the user to setting the delay time of power providing after device rebooted.

Web Interface

To configure Power over Ethernet Status in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, PoE, and Power delay.

2. Enable the port to the power device.

3. Specify the power providing delay time when reboot.

4. Click Apply to apply the change.

Figure 2-13.2: The PoE Power Delay

Parameter description:

Port :

This is the logical port number for this row.

Delay Mode :

Turn on / off the power delay function.

Enabled: Enable POE Power Delay.

Disabled: Disable POE Power Delay.

Delay Time(0~300sec) :

When rebooting, the PoE port will start to provide power to the PD when it out of delay time.

Default: 0, range: 0-300 sec.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

169 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

169 169

2-13.3 Schedule Profile

This page allows the user to make a perfect schedule of PoE power supply. PoE Scheduling not

only makes PoE management easier but also saves more energy

Web Interface

To configure Power Over Ethernet Scheduling in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, PoE, and Scheduling.

2. Select the local port and enable.

3. Select time and day to supply power.

4. Click Apply to apply the change.

Figure 2-13.3: The Schedule Profile

Parameter description:

Profile :

The index of profile. There are 16 profiles in the configuration.

Name :

The name of profile. The default name is "Profile #". User can define the name for identifying

the profile.

Week Day :

170 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

170 170

The day to schedule PoE.

Start Time :

The time to start PoE. The time 00:00 means the first second of this day.

End Time :

The time to stop PoE. The time 00:00 means the last second of this day.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

171 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

171 171

2-13.4 Auto Checking

This page allows the user to specify the auto detection parameters to check the linking status

between PoE ports and PDs. When it detected the fail connect, will reboot remote PD

automatically.

Web Interface

To configure Power over Ethernet Auto Checking in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, PoE, and Auto checking.

2. Enable the Ping Check function.

3. Specify the PDs IP address, checking interval, retry time, failure action and reboot time.

4. Click Apply to apply the change.

Figure 2-13.4: The PoE Scheduling

Parameter description:

Ping Check :

Enable Ping Check function can detects the connection between PoE port and power device.

Disable will turn off the detection.

Port :

This is the logical port number for this row.

Ping IP Address :

The PD's IP Address the system should ping.

Startup Time(sec) :

When PD has been start up, the Switch will wait Start up time to do PoE Auto Checking.

default: 60, range: 30-600 sec.

172 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

172 172

Interval Time(sec) :

Device will send checking message to PD each interval time. Default: 30, range: 10-120 sec.

Retry Time :

When PoE port can't ping the PD, it will retry to send detection again. When the third time, it

will trigger failure action. Default: 3, range: 1-5.

Failure Log :

Failure loggings counter.

Failure Action :

The action when the third fail detection.

Nothing: Keep Ping the remote PD but does nothing further.

Reboot Remote PD: Cut off the power of the PoE port, make PD rebooted.

Reboot time(sec) :

When PD has been rebooted, the PoE port restored power after the specified time. Default:

15, range: 3-120 sec.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

173 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

173 173

2-13.5 Chip Reset Schedule

This page allows user to schedule when to reset PoE chip

Web Interface

To configure Power over Ethernet Chip Reset Schedule in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, PoE, and Chip Reset Schedule.

2. Evoke to enable or disable the Mode.

3. Click Apply to apply the change.

Figure 2-13.5: The Chip Reset Schedule

Parameter description:

Mode :

Indicates the chip reset scheduling mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable PoE chip reset.

Disabled: Disable PoE chip reset.

Week Day :

The day to reset PoE chip.

PoE Chip Reset Time :

The time to reset PoE chip.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

174 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

174 174

2-14 MAC Table

Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The switch builds

up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames

should go to (based upon the DMAC address in the frame). This table contains both static and

dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the

administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.

The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address), which shows the MAC address of the

equipment sending the frame. The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically

update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic entries are removed from

the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a

configurable age time

Web Interface

To configure MAC Address Table in the web interface:

Aging Configuration

1. Click configuration and MAC Table.

2. Specify the Disable Automatic Aging and Aging Time.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

MAC Table Learning

1. Click configuration and MAC Table.

2. Specify the Port Members (Auto, Disable, Secure).

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Static MAC Table Configuration

1. Click configuration, MAC Table and Add new Static entry.

2. Specify the VLAN IP and Mac address, Port Members.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

175 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

175 175

Figure 2-14: The MAC Address Table Configuration

Parameter description:

Aging Configuration

By default, dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds. This

removal is also called aging.

Configure aging time by entering a value here in seconds; for example, Age time

seconds.

The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds.

Disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries by checking Disable automatic aging.

MAC Table Learning

If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out, another module is in control of the

mode, so that it cannot be changed by the user. An example of such a module is the

MAC-Based Authentication under 802.1X. Each port can do learning based upon the

following settings:

Auto :

Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received.

Disable :

No learning is done.

Secure :

Only static MAC entries are learned, all other frames are dropped.

NOTE: Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is

added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning

mode, otherwise the management link is lost and can only be

176 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

176 176

restored by using another non-secure port or by connecting to the

switch via the serial interface.

Static MAC Table Configuration

The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table. The static MAC table can contain

64 entries. The maximum of 64 entries is for the whole stack, and not per switch.

The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address.

VLAN ID :

The VLAN ID of the entry.

MAC Address :

The MAC address of the entry.

Port Members :

Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry. Check or uncheck as needed to

modify the entry.

Buttons

Adding a New Static Entry :

Click Add New Static Entry to add a new entry to the static MAC table. Specify the VLAN ID,

MAC address, and port members for the new entry. Click "Apply".

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Delete :

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

177 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

177 177

2-15 VLANs

To assign a specific VLAN for management purpose. The management VLAN is used to

establish an IP connection to the switch from a workstation connected to a port in the VLAN.

This connection supports a VSM, SNMP, and Telnet session. By default, the active

management VLAN is VLAN 1, but you can designate any VLAN as the management VLAN

using the Management VLAN window. Only one management VLAN can be active at a time.

When you specify a new management VLAN, your HTTP connection to the old management

VLAN is lost. For this reason, you should have a connection between your management station

and a port in the new management VLAN or connect to the new management VLAN through a

multi-VLAN route

Web Interface

To configure VLAN membership configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration and VLANS.

2. Modify Global VLAN Configuration parameter.

3. Scroll the Mode, Port VLAN and Port Type to enable the Port VLAN Configuration

parameter.

4. Click the Apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-15.1: The VLAN Configuration

Parameter description:

Global VLAN Configuration

Allowed Access VLANs :

This field shows the allowed Access VLANs, i.e. it only affects ports configured as Access

ports. Ports in other modes are members of all VLANs specified in the Allowed VLANs field.

By default, only VLAN 1 is enabled. More VLANs may be created by using a list syntax where

the individual elements are separated by commas. Ranges are specified with a dash

178 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

178 178

separating the lower and upper bound.

The following example will create VLANs 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 200, and 300: 1,10-13,200,300.

Spaces are allowed in between the delimiters.

Ethertype for Custom S-ports :

This field specifies the ethertype/TPID (specified in hexadecimal) used for Custom S-ports.

The setting is in force for all ports whose Port Type is set to S-Custom-Port.

Port VLAN Configuration

Port :

This is the logical port number of this row.

Mode :

The port mode (default is Access) determines the fundamental behavior of the port in

question. A port can be in one of three modes as described below.

Whenever a particular mode is selected, the remaining fields in that row will be either

grayed out or made changeable depending on the mode in question.

Grayed out fields show the value that the port will get when the mode is applied.

Access:

Access ports are normally used to connect to end stations. Dynamic features like Voice

VLAN may add the port to more VLANs behind the scenes. Access ports have the following

characteristics:

Member of exactly one VLAN, the Port VLAN (a.k.a. Access VLAN), which by default is 1,

accepts untagged frames and C-tagged frames,

discards all frames that are not classified to the Access VLAN,

on egress all frames are transmitted untagged.

Trunk:

Trunk ports can carry traffic on multiple VLANs simultaneously, and are normally used to

connect to other switches. Trunk ports have the following characteristics:

By default, a trunk port is member of all existing VLANs. This may be limited by the use of

Allowed VLANs,

unless VLAN Trunking is enabled on the port, frames classified to a VLAN that the port is

not a member of will be discarded,

by default, all frames but frames classified to the Port VLAN (a.k.a. Native VLAN) get

tagged on egress. Frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get C-tagged on egress,

egress tagging can be changed to tag all frames, in which case only tagged frames are

accepted on ingress,

VLAN trunking may be enabled.

Hybrid:

Hybrid ports resemble trunk ports in many ways, but adds additional port configuration

features. In addition to the characteristics described for trunk ports, hybrid ports have these

abilities:

Can be configured to be VLAN tag unaware, C-tag aware, S-tag aware, or S-custom-tag

aware,

ingress filtering can be controlled,

ingress acceptance of frames and configuration of egress tagging can be configured

independently.

Port VLAN :

Determines the port's VLAN ID (a.k.a. PVID). Allowed VLANs are in the range 1 through 4095,

default being 1.

On ingress, frames get classified to the Port VLAN if the port is configured as VLAN unaware,

the frame is untagged, or VLAN awareness is enabled on the port, but the frame is priority

tagged (VLAN ID = 0).

179 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

179 179

On egress, frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get tagged if Egress Tagging

configuration is set to untag Port VLAN.

The Port VLAN is called an "Access VLAN" for ports in Access mode and Native VLAN for

ports in Trunk or Hybrid mode.

Port Type :

Ports in hybrid mode allow for changing the port type, that is, whether a frame's VLAN tag is

used to classify the frame on ingress to a particular VLAN, and if so, which TPID it reacts on.

Likewise, on egress, the Port Type determines the TPID of the tag, if a tag is required.

Unaware:

On ingress, all frames, whether carrying a VLAN tag or not, get classified to the Port VLAN,

and possible tags are not removed on egress.

C-Port:

On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 get classified to the VLAN ID

embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to

the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with a C-tag.

S-Port:

On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 or 0x88A8 get classified to the

VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets

classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with an

S-tag.

S-Custom-Port:

On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with a TPID = 0x8100 or equal to the Ethertype

configured for Custom-S ports get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame

is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be

tagged on egress, they will be tagged with the custom S-tag.

Ingress Filtering :

Hybrid ports allow for changing ingress filtering. Access and Trunk ports always have ingress

filtering enabled.

If ingress filtering is enabled (checkbox is checked), frames classified to a VLAN that the port

is not a member of get discarded.

If ingress filtering is disabled, frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of

are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine. However, the port will never transmit

frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of.

VLAN Trunking :

Trunk and Hybrid ports allow for enabling VLAN trunking.

When VLAN trunking is enabled, frames classified to unknown VLANs are accepted on the

port whether ingress filtering is enabled or not.

This is useful in scenarios where a cloud of intermediary switches must bridge VLANs that

haven't been created. By configuring the ports that connect the cloud of switches as

trunking ports, they can seemlessly carry those VLANs from one end to the other.

Ingress Acceptance :

Hybrid ports allow for changing the type of frames that are accepted on ingress.

Tagged and untagged

both tagged and untagged frames are accepted.

Tagged Only

Only tagged frames are accepted on ingress. Untagged frames are discarded.

Untagged Only

Only untagged frames are accepted on ingress. Tagged frames are discarded.

Egress Tagging :

Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control the tagging of frames on egress.

180 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

180 180

Untag Port VLAN

Frames classified to the Port VLAN are transmitted untagged. Other frames are transmitted

with the relevant tag.

Tag All

All frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are transmitted with a tag.

Untag All

All frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are transmitted without a tag.

This option is only available for ports in Hybrid mode.

Allowed VLANs :

Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control which VLANs they are allowed to become

members of. Access ports can only be member of one VLAN, the Access VLAN.

The field's syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Existing VLANs field. By default, a port

may become member of all possible VLANs, and is therefore set to 1-4095.

The field may be left empty, which means that the port will not be member of any of the

existing VLANs, but if it is configured for VLAN Trunking it will still be able to carry all

unknown VLANs.

Forbidden VLANs :

A port may be configured to never be member of one or more VLANs. This is particularly

useful when dynamic VLAN protocols like MVRP and GVRP must be prevented from

dynamically adding ports to VLANs.

The trick is to mark such VLANs as forbidden on the port in question. The syntax is identical

to the syntax used in the Existing VLANs field.

By default, the field is left blank, which means that the port may become a member of all

possible VLANs.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

181 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

181 181

2-16 Private VLANs

2-16.1 Membership

The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here.

Private VLANs can be added or deleted here. Port members of each Private VLAN can be added

or removed here.

Private VLANs are based on the source port mask, and there are no connections to VLANs. This

means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical.

A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets. By

default, all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1.

A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN, but it can be a member of multiple

Private VLANs.

Web Interface

To configure Private VLAN Membership Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Private VLAN and Membership.

2. Evoke Private VLAN Membership Configuration.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-16.1: The Private VLAN Membership Configuration

Parameter description:

Private VLAN ID :

Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN.

Port Members :

A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID. To include

a port in a Private VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the

Private VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members,

and all boxes are unchecked.

182 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

182 182

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Delete :

To delete a private VLAN entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next

save.

Adding a New Private VLAN :

Click Add New Private VLAN to add a new private VLAN ID. An empty row is added

to the table, and the private VLAN can be configured as needed. The allowed range

for a private VLAN ID is the same as the switch port number range. Any values

outside this range are not accepted, and a warning message appears. Click "OK" to

discard the incorrect entry, or click "Cancel" to return to the editing and make a

correction.

The Private VLAN is enabled when you click "Save".

The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs.

183 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

183 183

2-16.2 Port Isolation

The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here.

Private VLANs can be added or deleted here. Port members of each Private VLAN can be added

or removed here.

Private VLANs are based on the source port mask, and there are no connections to VLANs. This

means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical.

A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets. By

default, all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1.

A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN, but it can be a member of multiple

Private VLANs.

Web Interface

To configure Port Isolation Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Private VLAN and Port Isolation.

2. Evoke Port Isolation Configuration.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-16.2: The Port Isolation Configuration

Parameter description:

Port Members :

A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN. When checked, port isolation is

enabled on that port. When unchecked, port isolation is disabled on that port. By default,

port isolation is disabled on all ports.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Auto-refresh :

184 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

184 184

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

185 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

185 185

2-17 VCL

2-17.1 MAC-based VLAN

The MAC-based VLAN entries can be configured here. This page allows for adding and deleting

MAC-based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports. This page shows only static

entries.

Web Interface

To configure MAC-based VLAN Membership Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, VLC and MAC-based VLAN configuration.

2. Specify the MAC address and VLAN ID.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-17.1: The MAC-based VLAN Membership Configuration

Parameter description:

MAC Address :

Indicates the MAC address.

VLAN ID :

Indicates the VLAN ID.

Port Members :

A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC-based VLAN entry. To include

a port in a MAC-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the

MAC-based VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and

all boxes are unchecked.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

186 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

186 186

Delete :

To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save. The entry will be deleted

on the selected switch in the stack.

Adding a New MAC-based VLAN :

Click Add New Entry to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry. An empty row is added to the

table, and the MAC-based VLAN entry can be configured as needed. Any unicast MAC

address can be configured for the MAC-based VLAN entry. No broadcast or multicast MAC

addresses are allowed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.

The MAC-based VLAN entry is enabled when you click on "Apply". A MAC-based VLAN

without any port members will be deleted when you click "Apply".

The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC-based VLANs. The

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

<< :

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with the

lowest VLAN ID.

> :

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

187 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

187 187

2-17.2 Protocol-based VLAN

This section describe Protocol -based VLAN, The Switch support Protocol include Ethernet LLC

SNAP Protocol,

LLC

The Logical Link Control (LLC) data communication protocol layer is the upper sub-layer of the

Data Link Layer (which is itself layer 2, just above the Physical Layer) in the seven-layer OSI

reference model. It provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several

network protocols (IP, IPX, Decent and Appletalk) to coexist within a multipoint network and to

be transported over the same network media, and can also provide flow control and automatic

repeat request (ARQ) error management mechanisms.

SNAP

The Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) is a mechanism for multiplexing, on networks using

IEEE 802.2 LLC, more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8-bit 802.2 Service Access

Point (SAP) fields. SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values; it also

supports vendor-private protocol identifier spaces. It is used with IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.4, IEEE

802.5, IEEE 802.11 and other IEEE 802 physical network layers, as well as with non-IEEE 802

physical network layers such as FDDI that use 802.2 LLC.

2-17.2.1 Protocol to Group

This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name (unique for each Group) mapping

entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the selected stack

switch unit switch.

Web Interface

To configure Protocol to Group Mapping Table configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, VLC, Protocol-based VLAN configuration and Protocol to Group.

2. Specify the Protocol to Group Mapping Table.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-17.2.1: The Protocol to Group Mapping Table

Parameter description:

188 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

188 188

Frame Type :

Frame Type can have one of the following values:

1. Ethernet

2. LLC

3. SNAP

NOTE: On changing the Frame type field, valid value of the following

text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected.

Value :

Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the

preceding Frame Type selection menu. Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types:

For Ethernet: Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called

etype. Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600-0xffff

For LLC: Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub-values.

a. DSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)

b. SSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)

For SNAP: Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub-values.

a. OUI: OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) is value in format of xx-xx-xx where each

pair (xx) in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00-0xff.

b. PID: If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000, the protocol ID is the Ethernet type (EtherType)

field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP; if the OUI is an OUI for a particular

organization, the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol

running on top of SNAP.In other words, if value of OUI field is 00-00-00 then value of PID

will be etype (0x0600-0xffff) and if value of OUI is other than 00-00-00 then valid value of

PID will be any value from 0x0000 to 0xffff.

Group Name :

A valid Group Name is a unique 16-character long string for every entry which consists of a

combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers (0-9).

NOTE: Special character and underscore (_) are not allowed.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

189 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

189 189

Delete :

To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted on

the switch during the next Save.

Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry :

Click to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to the table; Frame Type,

Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed.

The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

190 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

190 190

2-17.2.2 Group to VLAN

This page allows you to map already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch.

Web Interface

To configure Group Name to VLAN mapping Table in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, VLC, Protocol-based VLAN and Group to VLAN.

2. Specify the Group Name to VLAN Mapping Table.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-17.2.2: The Group Name to VLAN mapping Table

Parameter description:

Group Name :

A valid Group Name is a string at the most 16 characters which consists of a combination of

alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers(0-9), no special character is allowed. whichever Group

name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must

not be pre-used by any other existing mapping entry on this page.

VLAN ID :

Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped. A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1-4095.

Port Members :

A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping.

To include a port in a mapping, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the

mapping, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes

are unchecked.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Delete :

191 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

191 191

To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted on the

switch during the next save

Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry :

Click Add New Entry to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to the

table, the Group Name, VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed. Legal

values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.

The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new entry. The maximum possible

Group to VLAN mappings are limited to 64.

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

192 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

192 192

2-17.3 IP Subnet-based VLAN

The IP subnet-based VLAN entries can be configured here. This page allows for adding,

updating and deleting IP subnet-based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different

ports. This page shows only static entries.

Web Interface

To configure IP Subnet-based VLAN Membership Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, VLC and IP Subnet-based VLAN.

2. Click Add New Entry.

3. Specify the IP Subnet-based VLAN Membership Configuration.

4. Click the Apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-17.3: IP Subnet-based VLAN Membership Configuration

Parameter description:

VCE ID :

Indicates the index of the entry. It is user configurable. Its value ranges from 0-128. If a VCE

ID is 0, application will auto-generate the VCE ID for that entry. Deletion and lookup of IP

subnet-based VLAN are based on VCE ID.

IP Address :

Indicates the IP address.

Mask Length :

Indicates the network mask length.

VLAN ID :

Indicates the VLAN ID. VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries.

Port Members :

A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet-based VLAN entry. To

include a port in an IP subnet-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port

from the IP subnet-based VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are

members, and all boxes are unchecked.

Buttons

193 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

193 193

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Delete :

To delete an IP subnet-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save. The entry will be

deleted on the selected switch in the stack.

Adding a New IP subnet-based VLAN

Click Add New Entry to add a new IP subnet-based VLAN entry. An empty row is added to

the table, and the IP subnet-based VLAN entry can be configured as needed. Any IP

address/mask can be configured for the IP subnet-based VLAN entry. Legal values for a

VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.

The IP subnet-based VLAN entry is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click

on "Save". The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new IP subnet-based

VLANs. The maximum possible IP subnet-based VLAN entries are limited to 128.

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

194 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

194 194

2-18 VOICE VLAN

Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic. By adding the ports with voice

devices attached to voice VLAN, we can perform QoS-related configuration for voice data,

ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality.

2-18.1 Configuration

The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN, then the switch

can classify and schedule network traffic. It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port

- one for voice, one for data. Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone

should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI.

Web Interface

To configure Voice VLAN in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Voice VLAN and Configuration.

2. Select Enabled in the Voice VLAN Configuration.

3. Specify VLAN ID, Aging Time and Traffic Class.

4. Specify the Port Configuration.

5. Click the Apply to save the setting.

6. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-18.1: The Voice VLAN Configuration

195 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

195 195

196 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

196 196

Parameter description:

Mode :

Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation. We must disable MSTP feature before we enable

Voice VLAN. It can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN mode operation.

Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN mode operation.

VLAN ID :

Indicates the Voice VLAN ID. It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal

each port PVID. It is a conflict in configuration if the value equals management VID, MVR VID,

PVID etc. The allowed range is 1 to 4095.

Aging Time :

Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning aging time. The allowed range is 10 to 10000000

seconds. It is used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled. In other cases, it will

be based on hardware aging time. The actual aging time will be situated between the

[age_time; 2 * age_time] interval.

Traffic :

Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class. All traffic on the Voice VLAN will apply this class.

Port Mode :

Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode. Possible port modes are:

Disabled: Disjoin from Voice VLAN.

Auto: Enable auto detect mode. It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to the

specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically.

Forced: Force join to Voice VLAN.

This field will be read only if STP feature is enabled. And the STP port mode will be readonly

if this field be set to the mode other than Disabled.

Port Security :

Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode. When the function is enabled, all

non-telephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds. Possible

port modes are:

Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation.

Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation.

Port Discovery Protocol

Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol. It will only work when auto detect mode

is enabled. We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to "LLDP"

or "Both". Changing the discovery protocol to "OUI" or "LLDP" will restart auto detect

process. Possible discovery protocols are:

OUI: Detect telephony device by OUI address.

LLDP: Detect telephony device by LLDP.

Both: Both OUI and LLDP.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

197 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

197 197

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Delete :

To delete an IP subnet-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save. The entry will be

deleted on the selected switch in the stack.

198 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

198 198

2-18.2 OUI

Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this page. The maximum number of entries is 16. Modifying

the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process.

Web Interface

To configure Voice VLAN OUI Table in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, Voice VLAN and OUI.

2. Click Add New Entry.

3. Specify the Voice VLAN OUI Table.

4. Click the Apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-18.2: The Voice VLAN OUI Table

Parameter description:

Telephony OUI :

A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE. It must

be 6 characters long and the input format is "xx-xx-xx" (x is a hexadecimal digit).

Description :

The description of OUI address. Normally, it describes which vendor telephony device it

belongs to. The allowed string length is 0 to 32.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Delete :

199 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

199 199

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

Add New entry :

Click to add a new access management entry.

200 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

200 200

2-19 QoS

The switch support four QoS queues per port with strict or weighted fair queuing scheduling. It

supports QoS Control Lists (QCL) for advance programmable QoS classification, based on IEEE

802.1p, Ethertype, VID, IPv4/IPv6 DSCP and UDP/TCP ports and ranges.

High flexibility in the classification of incoming frames to a QoS class. The QoS classification

looks for information up to Layer 4, including IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP, IPv4 TCP/UDP port numbers,

and user priority of tagged frames. This QoS classification mechanism is implemented in a QoS

control list (QCL). The QoS class assigned to a frame is used throughout the device for

providing queuing, scheduling, and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to

what was configured for that specific QoS class.

The switch support advanced memory control mechanisms providing excellent performance of

all QoS classes under any traffic scenario, including jumbo frame. A super priority queue with

dedicated memory and strict highest priority in the arbitration. The ingress super priority

queue allows traffic recognized as CPU traffic to be received and queued for transmission to

the CPU even when all the QoS class queues are congested.

2-19.1 Port Classification

The section allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch

ports.

Web Interface

To configure the QoS Ingress Port Classification parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, QoS and Port Classification.

2. Scroll to select QoS Ingress Port parameters.

3. Click the Apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-19.1: The QoS Ingress Port Classification

201 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

201 201

Parameter description:

Port :

The port number for which the configuration below applies.

CoS :

Controls the default class of service.

All frames are classified to a CoS. There is a one to one mapping between CoS, queue and

priority. A CoS of 0 (zero) has the lowest priority.

If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is classified to a CoS that

is based on the PCP value in the tag as shown below. Otherwise the frame is classified to the

default CoS.

PCP value: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CoS value: 1 0 2 3 4 5 6 7

The classified CoS can be overruled by a QCL entry.

NOTE: If the default CoS has been dynamically changed, then the

actual default CoS is shown in parentheses after the configured

default CoS.

DPL :

Controls the default drop precedence level.

All frames are classified to a drop precedence level.

If the port is VLAN aware, the frame is tagged and Tag Class. is enabled, then the frame is

classified to a DPL that is mapped from the PCP and DEI value in the tag. Otherwise the

frame is classified to the default DPL.

The classified DPL can be overruled by a QCL entry.

DSCP Based :

Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

202 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

202 202

2-19.2 Port Policing

This section provides an overview of f QoS Ingress Port Policers for all switch ports The Port

Policing is useful in constraining traffic flows and marking frames above specific rates. Policing

is primarily useful for data flows and voice or video flows because voice and video usually

maintains a steady rate of traffic

Web Interface

To configure the QoS Ingress Port Policers in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, QoS and Port Policing

2. Evoke which port need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers and type the Rate limit

condition.

3. Scroll to select the column Rate and Unit.

4. Click the Apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Figure 2-19.2: The QoS Ingress Port Policers

Parameter description:

Port :

The port number for which the configuration below applies.

Enabled :

Controls whether the policer is enabled on this switch port.

Rate :

Controls the rate for the port policer. This value is restricted to 100-13128072 when "Unit" is

kbps, 1-13128 when "Unit" is mbps , 1-131071 when "Unit" is fps, and 1-131 when "Unit" is

kfps. The rate is internally rounded up to the nearest value supported by the port policer.

Unit :

Controls the unit of measure for the port policer rate as kbps, Mbps, fps or kfps.

Flow Control :

203 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

203 203

If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode, then pause frames are sent

instead of discarding frames.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

204 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

204 204

2-19.3 Port Schedulers

This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports.

Web Interface

To configure the QoS Ingress Port Policers in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, QoS and Port Schedulers.

2. Click the Port and display the QoS Egress Port Schedulers

3. Scroll Port and Scheduler Mode, specify the Queue Shaper parameter.

4. Click the Apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Click the Port index to set the QoS Egress Port Schedulers

205 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

205 205

Figure 2-19.3: The QoS Egress Port Schedules

Parameter description:

Port :

The logical port for the settings contained in the same row. Click on the port number in

order to configure the schedulers.

Qn :

Shows the weight for this queue and port.

Scheduler Mode :

Controls whether the scheduler mode is "Strict Priority" or "Weighted" on this switch port.

Queue Shaper Enable :

If you select the scheduler mode with wighted then the screen will change as the figure.

206 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

206 206

Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port.

Queue Shaper Rate :

Controls the rate for the queue shaper. The default value is 500. This value is restricted to

100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to 1-13200 when the "Unit" is

"Mbps".

Queue Shaper Unit :

Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps". The default

value is "kbps".

Queue Shaper Excess :

Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth.

Queue Scheduler Weight :

Controls the weight for this queue. The default value is "17". This value is restricted to 1-100.

This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".

Queue Scheduler Percent :

Shows the weight in percent for this queue. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler

Mode" is set to "Weighted"

Port Shaper Enable :

Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port.

Port Shaper Rate :

Controls the rate for the port shaper. The default value is 500. This value is restricted to

100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to 1-13200 when the "Unit" is

"Mbps".

Port Shaper Unit :

Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps". The default value

is "kbps".

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Cancel :

Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page.

207 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

207 207

2-19.4 Port Shaping

This page provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports.

Web Interface

To configure the QoS Egress Port Shapers in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, QoS and Port Shaping.

2. Click the Port and display the Qos Egress Port Shapers.

3. Scroll the Port and Scheduler Mode and specify the Queue Shaper parameter.

4. Click the Apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Click the Port index to set the QoS Egress Port Shapers

208 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

208 208

Figure 2-19.4: The QoS Egress Port Shapers

Parameter description:

Port :

The logical port for the settings contained in the same row. Click on the port number in

order to configure the schedulers.

Qn :

Shows the weight for this queue and port.

Scheduler Mode :

Controls whether the scheduler mode is "Strict Priority" or "Weighted" on this switch port.

Queue Shaper Enable :

If you select the scheduler mode with wighted then the screen will change as the figure.

209 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

209 209

Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port.

Queue Shaper Rate :

Controls the rate for the queue shaper. The default value is 500. This value is restricted to

100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to 1-13200 when the "Unit" is

"Mbps".

Queue Shaper Unit :

Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps". The default

value is "kbps".

Queue Shaper Excess :

Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth.

Queue Scheduler Weight :

Controls the weight for this queue. The default value is "17". This value is restricted to 1-100.

This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".

Queue Scheduler Percent :

Shows the weight in percent for this queue. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler

Mode" is set to "Weighted"

Port Shaper Enable :

Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port.

Port Shaper Rate :

Controls the rate for the port shaper. The default value is 500. This value is restricted to

100-1000000 when the "Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to 1-13200 when the "Unit" is

"Mbps".

Port Shaper Unit :

Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as "kbps" or "Mbps". The default value

is "kbps".

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Cancel :

Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page.

210 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

210 210

2-19.5 Port Tag Remarking

The Section provides user to get an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch

ports. Others the ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page

header. .

Web Interface

To configure the QoS Port Tag Remarking in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, QoS and Port Tag Remarking.

2. Click the Port and display the Qos Port Tag Remarking.

3. Scroll the Port and Tag Remarking Mode and specify the Queue Shaper parameter.

4. Click the Apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values.

Click the Port index to set the QoS Port Tag Remarking

211 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

211 211

Figure 2-19.5: The Port Tag Remarking

Parameter description:

Port :

The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking.

Mode :

Controls the tag remarking mode for this port.

Classified: Use classified PCP/DEI values.

212 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

212 212

Default: Use default PCP/DEI values.

Mapped: Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level.

PCP/DEI Configuration :

Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to Default.

(QoS class, DP level) to (PCP, DEI) Mapping :

Controls the mapping of the classified (QoS class, DP level) to (PCP, DEI) values when the

mode is set to Mapped.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Cancel :

Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page.

213 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

213 213

2-19.6 Port DSCP

The section will teach user to set the QoS Port DSCP configuration that was allowed you to

configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports. Others the

settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.

Web Interface

To configure the QoS Port DSCP parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, QoS and Port DSCP.

2. Evoke to enable or disable the Ingress Translate and Scroll the Classify parameter.

3. Scroll to select Egress Rewrite parameters

4. Click the apply to save the setting

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values

Figure 2-19.6: The QoS Port DSCP Configuration

Parameter description:

Port :

The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress

settings.

Ingress :

In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for

individual ports.

There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress:

1. Translate: To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox

2. Classify: Classification for a port have 4 different values

Disable: No Ingress DSCP Classification.

DSCP=0: Classify if incoming (or translated if enabled) DSCP is 0.

214 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

214 214

Selected: Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as

specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP.

All: Classify all DSCP.

Egress :

Port Egress Rewriting can be one of below parameters

Disable: No Egress rewrite.

Enable: Rewrite enable without remapped.

Remap: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped

DSCP value.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

215 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

215 215

2-19.7 DSCP-Based QoS

The section will teach user to configure the DSCP-Based QoS mode that This page allows

you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all

switches.

Web Interface

To configure the DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, QoS and DSCP-Based QoS.

2. Evoke to enable or disable the DSCP for Trust

3. Scroll to select QoS Class and DPL parameters

4. Click the save to save the setting

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values

Figure 2-19.7: The DSCP-Based QoS Ingress Classification Configuration

Parameter description:

DSCP :

Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64.

Trust :

216 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

216 216

Click to check if the DSCP value is trusted.

QoS Class :

QoS Class value can be any of (0-7)

DPL :

Drop Precedence Level (0-3)

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

217 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

217 217

2-19.8 DSCP Translation

The section describes the switch allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation

settings for all switches. DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress.

Web Interface

To configure the DSCP Translation parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, QoS and DSCP Translation

2. Scroll to set the Ingress Translate and Egress Remap DP0 and Remap DP1 Parameters

3. Evoke to enable or disable Classify

4. Click the apply to save the setting

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values

Figure 2-19.8: The DSCP Translation Configuration

Parameter description:

DSCP :

Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to

63.

Ingress :

Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class

and DPL map.

There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation

1. Translate: DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of (0-63) DSCP values.

218 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

218 218

2. Classify: Click to enable Classification at Ingress side.

Egress :

There are following configurable parameters for Egress side

1. Remap: Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap.

DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.

Remap DP0 :

Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges

form 0 to 63.

Remap DP1 :

Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges

form 0 to 63.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

219 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

219 219

2-19.9 DSCP Classification

The section describes to teach user to configure and allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS

Class and DPL value. Others the settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected

by the page header.

Web Interface

To configure the DSCP Classification parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, QoS and DSCP Translation

2. Scroll to set the DSCP Parameters

3. Click the apply to save the setting

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values

Figure 2-19.9: The DSCP Classification Configuration

Parameter description:

QoS Class :

Available QoS Class.

DPL :

Actual Drop Precedence Level.

DSCP :

Select the classified DSCP value (0-63).

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

220 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

220 220

2-19.10 QoS Control List

The section shows the QoS Control List (QCL), which is made up of the QCEs. Each row

describes a QCE that is defined. The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch. Click

on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list.

Web Interface

To configure the QoS Control List parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, QoS and QoS Contol List

2. Click the to add a new QoS Control List

3. Scroll all parameters and evoke the Port Member to join the QCE rules

4. Click the apply to save the setting

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values

Figure 2-19.10: The QoS Control List Configuration

221 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

221 221

Parameter description:

QCE :

Indicates the index of QCE.

Port :

Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.

DMAC :

Indicates the destination MAC address. Possible values are:

Any: Match any DMAC.

Unicast: Match unicast DMAC.

Multicast: Match multicast DMAC.

Broadcast: Match broadcast DMAC.

: Match specific DMAC.

The default value is 'Any'.

SMAC :

Match specific source MAC address or 'Any'.

If a port is configured to match on DMAC/DIP, this field indicates the DMAC.

Tag Type :

Indicates tag type. Possible values are:

Any: Match tagged and untagged frames.

Untagged: Match untagged frames.

Tagged: Match tagged frames.

C-Tagged: Match C-tagged frames.

S-Tagged: Match S-tagged frames.

The default value is 'Any'.

VID :

Indicates (VLAN ID), either a specific VID or range of VIDs. VID can be in the range 1-4095

or 'Any'

PCP :

Priority Code Point: Valid values of PCP are specific (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range(0-1, 2-3, 4-5,

6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or 'Any'.

DEI :

Drop Eligible Indicator: Valid value of DEI are 0, 1 or 'Any'.

Frame Type :

Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames. Possible frame types are:

Any: The QCE will match all frame type.

Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.

LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.

SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed

IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.

IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.

222 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

222 222

Action :

Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are

matched with the frame's content.

There are three action fields: Class, DPL and DSCP.

Class: Classified QoS Class; if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue.

DPL: Drop Precedence Level; if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value

displayed under DPL column.

DSCP: If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed

under DSCP column.

Modification Buttons :

You can modify each QCE (QoS Control Entry) in the table using the following buttons:

: Inserts a new QCE before the current row.

: Edits the QCE.

: Moves the QCE up the list.

: Moves the QCE down the list.

: Deletes the QCE.

: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings.

Port Members :

Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry. By

default all ports will be checked

Key Parameters :

Key configuration are described as below:

DMAC Destination MAC address: Possible values are 'Unicast', 'Multicast', 'Broadcast' or

'Any'.

SMAC Source MAC address: xx-xx-xx (24 MS bits OUI) or 'Any'.

Tag Value of Tag field can be 'Untagged', 'Tagged' or 'Any'.

VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1-4095 or 'Any'; user can enter

either a specific value or a range of VIDs.

PCP Valid value PCP are specific (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range (0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or

'Any'.

DEI Valid value of DEI can be '0', '1' or 'Any'.

Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values

1. Any

2. Ethernet

3. LLC

4. SNAP

5. IPv4

6. IPv6

NOTE: All frame types are explained below:

1. Any: Allow all types of frames.

223 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

223 223

2. Ethernet: Ethernet Type Valid Ethernet type can have value within

0x600-0xFFFF or 'Any', default value is 'Any'.

3. LLC: SSAP Address Valid SSAP(Source Service Access Point) can

vary from 0x00 to 0xFF or 'Any', the default value is 'Any'

DSAP Address Valid DSAP(Destination Service Access Point) can vary

from 0x00 to 0xFF or 'Any', the default value is 'Any'

Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to 0xFF or

'Any', the default value is 'Any'

4. SNAP : PID Valid PID(a.k.a Ethernet type) can have value within

0x00-0xFFFF or 'Any', default value is 'Any'

5. IPv4: Protocol IP protocol number: (0-255, TCP or UDP) or 'Any'

Source IP Specific Source IP address in value/mask format or 'Any'. IP

and Mask are in the format x.y.z.w where x, y, z, and w are decimal

numbers between 0 and 255. When Mask is converted to a 32-bit

binary string and read from left to right, all bits following the first zero

must also be zero DSCP Diffserv Code Point value (DSCP): It can be

specific value, range of value or 'Any'. DSCP values are in the range

0-63 including BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43

IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option: yes|no|any

Sport Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range

applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP

Dport Destination TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port

range applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP

6. IPv6 :Protocol IP protocol number: (0-255, TCP or UDP) or 'Any'

Source IP IPv6 source address: (a.b.c.d) or 'Any', 32 LS bits

DSCP Diffserv Code Point value (DSCP): It can be specific value, range

of value or 'Any'. DSCP values are in the range 0-63 including BE,

CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43

Sport Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range

applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP

Dport Destination TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port

range applicable for IP protocol UDP/TCP

Action Configuration :

Class QoS Class: "class (0-7)", default- basic classification

DP Valid DP Level can be (0-3)", default- basic classification

DSCP Valid dscp value can be (0-63, BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43) or 'Default'.

'Default' means that the default classified value is not modified by this QCE.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Cancel :

224 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

224 224

Return to the previous page without saving the configuration change.

2-19.11 Storm Control

There is a unicast storm rate control, multicast storm rate control, and a broadcast storm rate

control. These only affect flooded frames, i.e. frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not present

on the MAC Address table.

The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast, multicast or broadcast traffic

across the switch.

Web Interface

To configure the Storm Control Configuration parameters in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, QoS and Storm Control.

2. Evoke to select the frame type to enable storm control

3. Scroll to set the Rate Parameters

4. Click the apply to save the setting

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert to

previously saved values

Figure 2-19.11: The Storm Control Configuration

Parameter description:

Port :

The port number for which the configuration below applies.

Frame Type :

The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here: Unicast, Multicast or

Broadcast.

Enable :

Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type.

Rate :

The rate unit is packets per second (pps). Valid values are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512,

225 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

225 225

1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, 32K, 64K, 128K, 256K, 512K or 1024K.Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

226 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

226 226

2-20 Mirroring

To debug network problems, selected traffic can be copied, or mirrored, on a mirror port where a

frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow.

The traffic to be copied on the mirror port is selected as follows:

All frames received on a given port (also known as ingress or source mirroring).

All frames transmitted on a given port (also known as egress or destination mirroring).

Web Interface

To configure the Mirror in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration and Mirroring

2. Scroll to select Port to mirror on which port

3. Scroll to disabled, enable, TX Only and RX only to set the Port mirror mode

4. Click the apply to save the setting

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button.

It will revert to previously saved values

Figure 2-20: The Mirroring Configuration

227 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

227 227

Parameter description:

Port to mirror on

Port to mirror also known as the mirror port. Frames from ports that have either source (rx)

or destination (tx) mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port. Disabled disables mirroring.

Mirror Port Configuration

The following table is used for Rx and Tx enabling.

Port :

The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

Mode :

Select mirror mode.

Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port. Frames transmitted are

not mirrored.

Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port. Frames received are

not mirrored.

Disabled neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored.

Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port.

NOTE: For a given port, a frame is only transmitted once. It is therefore

not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port. Because of this,

mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

228 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

228 228

2-21 UPnP

UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play. The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to

connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home (data sharing,

communications, and entertainment) and in corporate environments for simplified installation

of computer components

Web Interface

To configure the UPnP Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration and UPnP.

2. Scroll to select the mode to enable or disable.

3. Specify the parameters in each blank field.

4. Click apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button.

It will revert to previously saved values.

Figure 2-21: The UPnP Configuration

Parameter description:

Mode :

Indicates the UPnP operation mode. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable UPnP mode operation.

Disabled: Disable UPnP mode operation.

When the mode is enabled, two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets

to CPU. The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled. .

TTL :

The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages. Valid values are in the

range 1 to 255.

Advertising Duration :

The duration, carried in SSDP packets, is used to inform a control point or control points

how often it or they should receive an SSDP advertisement message from this switch. If a

control point does not receive any message within the duration, it will think that the switch

no longer exists. Due to the unreliable nature of UDP, in the standard it is recommended

that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one-half of the advertising

229 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

229 229

duration. In the implementation, the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval

one-half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds. Valid values are in the range 100 to

86400.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

230 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

230 230

2-22 GVRP

The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) provides a generic framework whereby

devices in a bridged LAN, e.g. end stations and switches, can register and de-register attribute

values, such as VLAN Identifiers, with each other. In doing so, the attributes are propagated to

devices in the bridged LAN, and these devices form a reachability tree that is a subset of an

active topology. GARP defines the architecture, rules of operation, state machines and variables

for the registration and de-registration of attribute values.

A GARP participation in a switch or an end station consists of a GARP application component,

and a GARP Information Declaration (GID) component associated with each port or the switch.

The propagation of information between GARP participants for the same application in a

bridge is carried out by the GARP Information Propagation (GIP) component. Protocol

exchanges take place between GARP participants by means of LLC Type 1 services, using the

group MAC address and PDU format defined for the GARP application concerned.

2-22.1 Global Config

This page allows you to configure the basic GVRP Configuration settings for all switch ports.

Web Interface

To configure the GVRP in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, GVRP and Global Config

2. Evoke to enable or disable the GVRP.

3. Specify Join-time, Leave-time, Leave All-time, Max VLANs

4. Click apply to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button.

It will revert to previously saved values.

Figure 2-22.1: The GVRP Configuration

231 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

231 231

Parameter description:

Enable GVRP globally

The GVRP feature is enabled by setting the check mark in the checkbox named Enable GVRP.

GVRP protocol timers

Join-time is a value in the range 1-20 in the units of centi seconds, i.e. in units of one

hundredth of a second. The default is 20.

Leave-time is a value in the range 60-300 in the units of centi seconds, i.e. in units of one

hundredth of a second. The default is 60.

Leave All-time is a value in the range 1000-5000 in the units of centi seconds, i.e. in units of

one hundredth of a second. The default is 1000.

Max number of VLANs

When GVRP is enabled a maximum number of VLANs supported by GVRP is specified. By

default this number is 20. This number can only be changed when GVRP is turned off.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

232 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

232 232

2-22.2 Port Config

This page allows you to configure the basic GVRP Configuration settings for all switch ports.

The settings relate to the currently selected unit, as reflected by the page header.

Web Interface

To configure the GVRP in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, GVRP and Port Config

2. Evoke to enable or disable the Mode.

3. Click apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button.

It will revert to previously saved values.

Figure 2-22.2: The GVRP Configuration

Parameter description:

Port :

The Port column shows the list of ports.

Mode :

This configuration is to enable/disable GVRP Mode on particular port locally.

Disable: Select to Disable GVRP mode on this port.

GVRP Enable: Select to Enable GVRP mode on this port.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

233 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

233 233

2-23 sFlow

The sFlow Collector configuration for the switch can be monitored and modified here. The

configuration is divided into two parts: Configuration of the sFlow receiver (a.k.a. sFlow

collector) and configuration of per-port flow and counter samplers.

sFlow configuration is not persisted to non-volatile memory, which means that a reboot or

master change will disable sFlow sampling.

Web Interface

To configure the sFlow in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration and sFlow.

2. Set the parameters.

3. Click apply to save the setting.

4. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button.

It will revert to previously saved values.

234 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

234 234

Figure 2-23: The sFlow Configuration

Parameter description:

Agent Configuration

IP Address :

The IP address used as Agent IP address in sFlow datagrams. It serves as a unique key that

will identify this agent over extended periods of time.

Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported.

Receiver Configuration

Owner :

Basically, sFlow can be configured in two ways: Through local management using the Web

or CLI interface or through SNMP. This read-only field shows the owner of the current sFlow

configuration and assumes values as follows:

If sFlow is currently unconfigured/unclaimed, Owner contains .

If sFlow is currently configured through Web or CLI, Owner contains

local management>.

If sFlow is currently configured through SNMP, Owner contains a string identifying the

sFlow receiver.

If sFlow is configured through SNMP, all controls - except for the Release-button - are

disabled to avoid inadvertent reconfiguration.

The Release button allows for releasing the current owner and disable sFlow sampling. The

button is disabled if sFlow is currently unclaimed. If configured through SNMP, the release

must be confirmed (a confirmation request will appear).

IP Address/Hostname :

The IP address or hostname of the sFlow receiver. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are

supported.

UDP Port :

The UDP port on which the sFlow receiver listens to sFlow datagrams. If set to 0 (zero), the

default port (6343) is used.

Timeout :

The number of seconds remaining before sampling stops and the current sFlow owner is

released. While active, the current time left can be updated with a click on the

Refresh-button. If locally managed, the timeout can be changed on the fly without affecting

any other settings.

Max. Datagram Size :

The maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample datagram. This

should be set to a value that avoids fragmentation of the sFlow datagrams. Valid range is

200 to 1468 bytes with default being 1400 bytes.

Port Configuration

Port :

The port number for which the configuration below applies.

Flow Sampler Enabled :

Enables/disables flow sampling on this port.

235 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

235 235

Flow Sampler Sampling Rate :

The statistical sampling rate for packet sampling. Set to N to sample on average 1/Nth of

the packets transmitted/received on the port.

Not all sampling rates are achievable. If an unsupported sampling rate is requested, the

switch will automatically adjust it to the closest achievable. This will be reported back in this

field.

Flow Sampler Max. Header :

The maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet to the sFlow

datagram. Valid range is 14 to 200 bytes with default being 128 bytes.

If the maximum datagram size does not take into account the maximum header size,

samples may be dropped.

Counter Poller Enabled :

Enables/disables counter polling on this port.

Counter Poller Interval :

With counter polling enabled, this specifies the interval - in seconds - between counter

poller samples.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Release :

See description under Owner.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page. Note that unsaved changes will be lost.

236 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

236 236

2-24 SMTP

The function is used to set an Alarm trap when the switch alarm then you could set the SMTP

server to send you the alarm mail.

Web Interface

To configure the SMTP Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Configuration, SMTP Configuration

2. Scroll to select the Severity Level

3. Specify the parameters in each blank field.

4. Click the apply to save the setting

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button.

It will revert to previously saved values

Figure 2-25: The SMTP Configuration

Parameter description:

These parameters are displayed on the SMTP Configuration page:

Mail Server :

Specify the IP Address of the server transferring your email.

User name :

Specify the username on the mail server.

Password :

237 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

237 237

Specify the password on the mail server.

Sender :

To set the mail sender name.

Return-Path :

To set the mail return-path as sender mail address.

Email Address 1-6 :

Email address that would like to receive the alarm message.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

238 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

238 238

Chapter 3 Monitor

This chapter describes all of the basic network statistics which includes the Ports, Layer

2 network protocol (e.g. NAS, ACL, DHCP, AAA and RMON etc.) and any setting of the

Switch.

3-1 System

After you login, the switch shows you the system information. This page is default and tells you

the basic information of the system, including Model Name, System Description, Contact,

Location, System Up Time, Firmware Version, Host Mac Address, Device Port. With

this information, you will know the software version used, MAC address, serial number, how

many ports good and so on. This is helpful while malfunctioning.

3-1.1 Information

The switch system information is provided here.

Web interface

To display System Information in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, System and Information.

2. Check the contact information for the system administrator as well as the name and

location of the switch. Also indicate the local time zone by configuring the appropriate

offset.

3. Click the Refresh

239 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

239 239

Figure 3-1.1: System Information

Parameter description:

Model Name :

Displays the factory defined model name for identification purpose.

System Description :

Displays the system description.

Location :

The system location configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Location.

Contact :

The system contact configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Contact.

System Name :

Displays the user-defined system name that configured in System | System Information |

Configuration | System Name.

System Date :

The current (GMT) system time and date. The system time is obtained through the Timing

server running on the switch, if any.

System Uptime :

The period of time the device has been operational.

Bootloader Version :

Displays the current boot loader version number.

Firmware Version :

Displays the current firmware version number.

Hardware Version :

Displays the hardware version of the device.

240 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

240 240

Mechanical Version :

Displays the mechanical version of the device.

Serial Number :

Displays the unique serial number that assigned to the device.

MAC Address :

The MAC Address of this switch.

Memory :

Displays the memory size of the system.

FLASH :

Displays the flash size of the system.

CPU Load (100ms, 1s, 10s) :

Displays the cpu loading (100ms, 1s, 10s) of the system.

241 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

241 241

3-1.2 IP Status

This page displays the status of the IP protocol layer. The status is defined by the IP interfaces,

the IP routes and the neighbour cache (ARP cache) status.

Web Interface

To display the log configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, System and IP Status.

2. Display the IP address information.

Figure 3-1.2: The IP Status

Parameter description:

242 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

242 242

IP Interfaces

Interface :

Show the name of the interface.

Type :

Show the address type of the entry. This may be LINK or IPv4.

Address :

Show the current address of the interface (of the given type).

Status :

Show the status flags of the interface (and/or address).

IP Routes

Network :

Show the destination IP network or host address of this route.

Gateway :

Show the gateway address of this route.

Status :

Show the status flags of the route.

Neighbour cache

IP Address :

Show the IP address of the entry.

Link Address :

Show the Link (MAC) address for which a binding to the IP address given exist.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

243 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

243 243

3-1.3 Log

The switch system log information is provided here.

Web Interface

To display the log configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, System and Log.

2. Display the system log information.

Figure 3-1.3: The System Log Information

Parameter description:

ID :

The identification of the system log entry.

Level :

The level of the system log entry.

Emerg: The system log entry is belonged emergency level.

Alert: The system log entry is belonged alert level.

Crit: The system log entry is belonged critical level.

244 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

244 244

Error: The system log entry is belonged error level.

Warning: The system log entry is belonged warning level.

Notice: The system log entry is belonged notice level.

Info: The system log entry is belonged information level.

Debug: The system log entry is belonged debug level.

Time :

The occurred time of the system log entry.

Message :

The detail message of the system log entry.

iPush Status :

The status of sending this syslog to iPush server.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear :

Flushes the selected log entries.

:

Updates the system log entries, starting from the first available entry ID.

:

Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.

:

Updates the system log entries, starting from the last entry currently displayed.

:

Updates the system log entries, ending at the last available entry ID.

3-1.4 Detailed Log

The switch system detailed log information is provided here.

Web Interface

To display the detailed log configuration in the web interface:

245 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

245 245

1. Click Monitor, System and Detailed Log.

2. Display the log information.

Figure 3-1.4: The Detailed System Log Information

Parameter description:

ID :

The ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.

Message :

The detailed message of the system log entry.

Buttons

Refresh :

Updates the system log entry to the current entry ID.

:

Updates the system log entry to the first available entry ID.

:

Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID.

:

Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID.

:

Updates the system log entry to the last available entry ID.

246 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

246 246

3-1.5 Overview

The switch system overview is provided here.

Web Interface

To display the switch system overview in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, System and Detailed Log.

2. Display the switch system overview.

Figure 3-1.5: The System Overview

Parameter description:

Model Name :

Displays the factory defined model name for identification purpose.

Connected Devices :

Total of currently connected devices.

PoE Power Consumption :

Current PoE power consumption.

Total PoE Available :

Total PoE Budget availability.

Firmware Version :

Displays the current firmware version number.

MAC Address :

The MAC Address of this switch.

System Uptime :

The period of time the device has been operational.

IP Address :

247 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

247 247

The IPv4 or IPv6 address of the interface.

Subnet Mask :

The IPv4 or IPv6 network mask of the interface.

Gateway :

The IP address of the IP gateway.

Primary DNS :

The IP address of the DNS Server.

248 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

248 248

3-2 Green Ethernet

3-2.1 Port Power Savings

This page provides the current status for EEE.

Web Interface

To display the switch system overview in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, Green Ethernet and Port Power Savings.

2. Display the Port Power Saving Status.

Figure 3-2.1: The Port Power Saving Status

Parameter description:

Local Port :

This is the logical port number for this row.

Link :

Shows if the link is up for the port (green = link up, red = link down).

EEE :

Shows if EEE is enabled for the port (reflects the settings at the Port Power Savings

configuration page).

LP EEE cap :

Shows if the link partner is EEE capable.

EEE Savings :

Shows if the system is currently saving power due to EEE. When EEE is enabled, the system

will powered down if no frame has been received or transmitted in 5 uSec.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh : Click to refresh the page.

249 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

249 249

3-3 Ports

The section describes to configure the Port detail parameters of the switch. Others you could

using the Port configure to enable or disable the Port of the switch. Monitor the ports content

or status in the function.

3-3.1 Traffic Overview

This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports.

Web Interface

To Display the Port Statistics Overview in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, Port and Traffic Overview.

2. If you want to auto-refresh then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port statistics or clear all information when you click Clear.

Figure 3-3.1: The Port Statistics Overview

Parameter description:

Port :

The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

Packets :

The number of received and transmitted packets per port.

Bytes :

The number of received and transmitted bytes per port.

Errors :

The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per

port.

250 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

250 250

Drops :

The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion.

Filtered :

The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear :

Flushes the selected log entries.

251 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

251 251

3-3.2 Qos Statistics

This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports.

Web Interface

To Display the Queuing Counters in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, Ports and QoS Statistics

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters or clear all information when you click

Clear.

Figure 3-3.2: The Queuing Counters Overview

Parameter description:

Port :

The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

Qn :

Qn is the Queue number, There are 8 QoS queues per port. Q0 is the lowest priority queue.

Rx/Tx :

The number of received and transmitted packets per queue.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear :

Flushes the selected log entries.

252 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

252 252

3-3.3 QCL Status

The section will let you know how to configure and shows the QCL status

by different QCL users. Each row describes the QCE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific

QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum number of

QCEs is 256 on each switch.

Web Interface

To display the QoS Control List Status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, Ports and QCL Status

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Scroll to select the combined, static, Voice VLAN and conflict.

4. To click the Refresh to refresh an entry of the MVR Statistics Information.

Figure 3-3.3: The QoS Control List Status

Parameter description:

User :

Indicates the QCL user.

QCE :

Indicates the index of QCE.

Port :

Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.

Frame Type :

Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames. Possible frame types are:

Any: The QCE will match all frame type.

Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.

LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed

LLC: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed.

IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.

IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.

Action :

253 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

253 253

Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are

matched with the frame's content.

There are three action fields: Class, DPL and DSCP.

Class: Classified QoS Class; if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue.

DPL: Drop Precedence Level; if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value

displayed under DPL column.

DSCP: If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed

under DSCP column.

Conflict :

Displays Conflict status of QCL entries. It may happen that resources required to add a QCE

may not available, in that case it shows conflict status as 'Yes', otherwise it is always 'No.

Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the H/W resources required to add

QCL entry on pressing 'Resolve Conflict' button.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Combined :

Select the QCL status from this drop down list.

Resolve Conflict :

Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry, in case the conflict status for any

QCL entry is 'yes'.

254 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

254 254

3-3.4 Detailed Statistics

The section describes how to provide detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port. Use the

port select box to select which switch port details to display.

The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit, the size counters for receive and

transmit, and the error counters for receive and transmit.

Web Interface

To Display per port detailed Statistics Overview in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, Ports and Detailed Port Statistics

2. Scroll the Port Index to select which port you want to show the detailed

3. Port statistics overview.

4. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

5. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics or clear all information when you click

Clear.

255 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

255 255

Figure 3-3.4: The Detailed Port Statistics

Parameter description:

Receive Total and Transmit Total

Rx and Tx Packets :

The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets.

Rx and Tx Octets :

The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes. Includes FCS, but excludes

framing bits.

Rx and Tx Unicast :

The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) unicast packets.

Rx and Tx Multicast :

The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) multicast packets.

Rx and Tx Broadcast :

The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) broadcast packets.

Rx and Tx Pause :

A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an

opcode indicating a PAUSE operation.

Receive and Transmit Size Counters

256 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

256 256

The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets split into categories based

on their respective frame sizes.

Receive and Transmit Queue Counters

The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue.

Receive Error Counters

Rx Drops :

The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion.

Rx CRC/Alignment :

The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors.

Rx Undersize :

The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC.

Rx Oversize :

The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC.

Rx Fragments :

The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC.

Rx Jabber :

The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC.

Rx Filtered :

The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.

Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes.

Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this

port.

Transmit Error Counters

Tx Drops :

The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion.

Tx Late/Exc. Coll. :

The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear :

Flushes the selected log entries.

257 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

257 257

3-3.5 SFP Detail Info

This page displays general SFP information and monitoring information.

Web Interface

To Display the SFP information in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, Ports and SFP Detail Info.

2. To display the SFP Information.

Figure 3-3.5: The SFP Detail Information

Parameter description:

Connector Type :

Display the connector type, for instance, UTP, SC, ST, LC and so on.

Fiber Type :

Display the fiber mode, for instance, Multi-Mode, Single-Mode.

Tx Central Wavelength :

Display the fiber optical transmitting central wavelength, for instance, 850nm, 1310nm,

1550nm and so on.

Bit Rate :

Displays the nominal bit rate of the transceiver.

Vendor OUI :

Display the Manufacturer's OUI code which is assigned by IEEE.

Vendor Name :

Display the company name of the module manufacturer.

258 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

258 258

Vendor P/N :

Display the product name of the naming by module manufacturer.

Vendor Rev (Revision) :

Display the module revision.

Vendor SN (Serial Number) :

Show the serial number assigned by the manufacturer.

Date Code :

Show the date this SFP module was made.

Temperature :

Show the current temperature of SFP module.

Vcc :

Show the working DC voltage of SFP module.

Mon1(Bias) mA :

Show the Bias current of SFP module.

Mon2(TX PWR) :

Show the transmit power of SFP module.

Mon3(RX PWR) :

Show the receiver power of SFP module.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

259 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

259 259

3-4 DHCP

3-4.1 Server

DHCP Server is used to allocate network addresses and deliver configuration parameters to

dynamically configured hosts called DHCP client.

3-4.1.1 Statistics

This page displays the database counters and the number of DHCP messages sent and

received by DHCP server.

Web Interface

To display the DHCP server Statistics Overview in the web interface:

1. Click DHCP, Server and Statistics.

2. To display the DHCP Server Statistics.

Figure 3-4.1.1: The DHCP Server Statistics

Parameter description:

Database Counters

Display counters of various databases.

Pool :

Number of pools.

Excluded IP Address :

Number of excluded IP address ranges.

Declined IP Address :

260 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

260 260

Number of sec lined IP addresses.

Binding Counters

Display counters of various databases

Automatic Binding :

Number of bindings with network-type pools.

Manual Binding :

Number of bindings that administrator assigns an IP address to a client. That is, the pool is

of host type.

Expired Binding :

Number of bindings that their lease time expired or they are cleared from

Automatic/Manual type bindings.

DHCP Message Received Counters

Display counters of DHCP messages received by DHCP server.

DISCOVER :

Number of DHCP DISCOVER messages received.

REQUEST :

Number of DHCP REQUEST messages received.

DECLINE :

Number of DHCP DECLINE messages received.

RELEASE :

Number of DHCP RELEASE messages received.

INFORM :

Number of DHCP INFORM messages received.

DHCP Message Sent Counters

Display counters of DHCP messages sent by DHCP server.

OFFER :

Number of DHCP OFFER messages sent.

ACK :

Number of DHCP ACK messages sent.

NAK :

Number of DHCP NAK messages sent.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear : Flushes the selected log entries.

261 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

261 261

3-4.1.2 Binding

This page displays bindings generated for DHCP clients.

Web Interface

To Display DHCP Server Binding IP in the web interface:

1. Click DHCP, Server and Binding.

2. To display the DHCP Server Binding IP.

Figure 3-4.1.2: The DHCP Server Binding IP

Parameter description:

Binding IP Address

Display all bindings.

IP :

IP address allocated to DHCP client.

Type :

Type of binding. Possible types are Automatic, Manual, and Expired.

State :

State of binding. Possible states are Committed, Allocated, and Expired.

Pool Name :

The pool that generates the binding.

Server ID :

Server IP address to service the binding.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear Selected :

Click to clear selected bindings. If the selected binding is Automatic or Manual, then it is

262 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

262 262

changed to be Expired. If the selected binding is Expired, then it is freed.

Clear Automatic :

Click to clear all Automatic bindings and Change them to Expired bindings.

Clear Manual :

Click to clear all Manual bindings and Change them to Expired bindings.

Clear Expired :

Click to clear all Expired bindings and free them.

263 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

263 263

3-4.1.3 Declined IP

This page displays declined IP addresses.

Web Interface

To Display DHCP Server Declined IP in the web interface:

1. Click DHCP, Server and Declined IP.

2. To display the DHCP Declined IP.

Figure 3-4.1.3: The Declined IP

Parameter description:

Declined IP Addresses

Display IP addresses declined by DHCP clients.

Declined IP :

List of IP addresses declined.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

264 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

264 264

3-4.2 Snooping Table

This page display the dynamic IP assigned information after DHCP Snooping mode is disabled.

All DHCP clients obtained the dynamic IP address from the DHCP server will be listed in this

table except for local VLAN interface IP addresses. Entries in the Dynamic DHCP snooping

Table are shown on this page.

Web Interface

To display the DHCP in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, DHCP and Snooping table

2. To display Dynamic DHCP Snooping Table.

Figure 3-4.2: The DHCP snooping table

Parameter description:

DHCP snooping Table Columns

MAC Address :

User MAC address of the entry.

VLAN ID :

VLAN-ID in which the DHCP traffic is permitted.

Source Port:

Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.

IP Address :

User IP address of the entry.

IP Subnet Mask :

User IP subnet mask of the entry.

DHCP Server Address :

DHCP Server address of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

:

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic DHCP snooping Table.

265 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

265 265

:

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

266 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

266 266

3-4.3 Relay Statistics

This page provides statistics for DHCP relay.

Web Interface

To monitor a DHCP Relay statistics in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, DHCP and Relay Statistics

2. To display DHCP relay statistics.

Figure 3-4.3: The DHCP relay statistics

Parameter description:

Server Statistics

Transmit to Server :

The number of packets that are relayed from client to server.

Transmit Error :

The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients.

Receive from Server :

The number of packets received from server.

Receive Missing Agent Option:

The number of packets received without agent information options.

Receive Missing Circuit ID :

The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing.

Receive Missing Remote ID :

The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing.

Receive Bad Circuit ID:

267 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

267 267

The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID.

Receive Bad Remote ID :

The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID.

Client Statistics

Transmit to Client :

The number of relayed packets from server to client.

Transmit Error :

The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers.

Receive from Client :

The number of received packets from server.

Receive Agent Option :

The number of received packets with relay agent information option.

Replace Agent Option :

The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option.

Keep Agent Option :

The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained.

Drop Agent Option :

The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear :

Flushes the selected log entries.

268 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

268 268

3-4.4 Detailed Statistics

This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping. Notice that the normal forward per-port TX

statistics isn't increased if the incoming DHCP packet is done by L3 forwarding mechanism.

And clear the statistics on specific port may not take effect on global statistics since it gathers

the different layer overview.

Web Interface

To display monitor DHCP Relay statistics in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, DHCP and Detailed Statistics

2. To display DHCP relay statistics.

Figure 3-4.4: The DHCP Detailed Statistics

Parameter description:

Server Statistics

Rx and Tx Discover :

The number of discover (option 53 with value 1) packets received and transmitted.

Rx and Tx Offer :

The number of offer (option 53 with value 2) packets received and transmitted.

Rx and Tx Request :

269 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

269 269

The number of request (option 53 with value 3) packets received and transmitted.

Rx and Tx Decline:

The number of decline (option 53 with value 4) packets received and transmitted.

Rx and Tx ACK:

The number of ACK (option 53 with value 5) packets received and transmitted.

Rx and Tx NAK:

The number of NAK (option 53 with value 6) packets received and transmitted.

Rx and Tx Release:

The number of release (option 53 with value 7) packets received and transmitted.

Rx and Tx Inform:

The number of inform (option 53 with value 8) packets received and transmitted.

Rx and Tx Lease Query:

The number of lease query (option 53 with value 10) packets received and transmitted.

Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned:

The number of lease unassigned (option 53 with value 11) packets received and transmitted.

Rx and Tx Lease Unknown:

The number of lease unknown (option 53 with value 12) packets received and transmitted. Rx and Tx

Lease Active

Rx and Tx Lease Active:

The number of lease active (option 53 with value 13) packets received and transmitted.

Rx Discarded checksum error:

The number of discard packet that IP/UDP checksum is error.

Rx Discarded from Untrusted:

The number of discarded packet that are coming from untrusted port.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear :

Flushes the selected log entries.

270 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

270 270

3-5 Security

3-5.1 Access Management Statistics

This section shows you a detailed statistics of the Access Management including HTTP, HTTPS,

SSH. TELNET, and SSH.

Web Interface

To display the Assess Management Statistics in the web interface:

1. Click Security, Access Management Statistics.

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics or clear all information when you click

Clear.

Figure 3-5.1: The Access Management Statistics

Parameter description:

Interface :

The interface type through which the remote host can access the switch.

Received Packets :

Number of received packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled.

Allowed Packets :

Number of allowed packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled

Discarded Packets :

Number of discarded packets from the interface when access management mode is

enabled.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

271 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

271 271

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear :

Flushes the selected log entries.

272 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

272 272

3-5.2 Network

3-5.2.1 Port Security

3-5.2.1.1 Switch

This section shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no direct

configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When a

user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning.

In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module,

which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block

it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must

unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it

will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise. The status page is divided into two

sections - one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status.

Web Interface

To display the Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Security, Network, Port Security and Switch

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-5.2.1.1: The Port Security Switch Status

Parameter description:

User Module Legend

The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services.

User Module Name :

The full name of a module that may request Port Security services.

Abbr :

273 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

273 273

A one-letter abbreviation of the user module. This is used in the Users column in the port

status table.

Port Status

The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns, which

are:

Port :

The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the status for

this particular port.

Users :

Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port

Security or not. A '-' means that the corresponding user module is not enabled, whereas a

letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter (see Abbr) has enabled port

security.

State :

Shows the current state of the port. It can take one of four values:

Disabled: No user modules are currently using the Port Security service.

Ready: The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module, and is awaiting frames

from unknown MAC addresses to arrive.

Limit Reached: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module,

and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should

be taken in.

Shutdown: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module,

and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded. No MAC addresses can be learned

on the port until it is administratively re-opened on the Limit Control configuration

Web-page.

MAC Count (Current, Limit) :

The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses (forwarding as

well as blocked) and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the

port, respectively.

If no user modules are enabled on the port, the Current column will show a dash (-).

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

274 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

274 274

3-5.2.1.2 Port

This section shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module. Port Security is a

module with no direct configuration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the

user modules. When a user module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for

software-based learning. In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to

the port security module, which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC

address to forward or block it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled

user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one

chooses to block it, it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise.

Web Interface

To display the Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Security, Network, Port Security and then Port.

2. Specify the Port which you want to monitor.

3. Checked Auto-refresh.

4. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-5.2.1.2: The Port Security Port Status

Parameter description:

MAC Address & VLAN ID :

The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port. If no MAC addresses are learned, a

single row stating "No MAC addresses attached" is displayed.

State :

Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding. In the blocked

state, it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic.

Time of Addition :

Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port.

Age/Hold :

If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address, it will stay in the blocked

state until the hold time (measured in seconds) expires. If all user modules have decided to

allow this MAC address to forward, and aging is enabled, the Port Security module will

periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic. If the age period (measured in

seconds) expires and no frames have been seen, the MAC address will be removed from the

275 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

275 275

MAC table. Otherwise a new age period will begin.

If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely, a

dash (-) will be shown.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear :

Flushes the selected log entries.

276 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

276 276

3-5.2.2 NAS

3-5.2.2.1 Switch

The section describes to show the each port NAS status information of the switch. The status

includes Admin State Port State, Last Source, Last ID, QoS Class, and Port VLAN ID.

Web Interface

To display the NAS Switch Status Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Security, Network, NAS and then Port.

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-5.2.2.1: The Network Access Server Switch Status

Parameter description:

Port :

The switch port number. Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port.

Admin State :

The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of

possible values.

Port State :

The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual

states.

Last Source :

The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for

EAPOL-based authentication, and the most recently received frame from a new client for

MAC-based authentication.

Last ID :

The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the most recently received Response Identity

EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the source MAC address from the most

277 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

277 277

recently received frame from a new client for MAC-based authentication.

QoS Class :

QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled.

Port VLAN ID :

The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID is not

overridden by NAS.

If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to the

VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.

If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID. Read more

about Guest VLANs here.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

278 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

278 278

3-5.2.2.2 Port

The section describes to provide detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running

EAPOL-based IEEE 802.1X authentication. For MAC-based ports, it shows selected backend server

(RADIUS Authentication Server) statistics, only.

Web Interface

To display the NAS Port Status Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Security, Network, NAS and then Port.

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-5.2.2.2: The NAS Statistics

Parameter description:

Port State

Admin State :

The port's current administrative state. Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of

possible values.

Port State :

The current state of the port. Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual

states.

QoS Class :

The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server. The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned.

Port VLAN ID :

The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID is not

overridden by NAS.

If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to the

VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.

If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID. Read more

about Guest VLANs here.

Port Counters

EAPOL Counters :

279 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

279 279

These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states:

Force Authorized

Force Unauthorized

Port-based 802.1X

Single 802.1X

Multi 802.1X

Backend Server Counters :

These backend (RADIUS) frame counters are available for the following administrative

states:

Port-based 802.1X

Single 802.1X

Multi 802.1X

MAC-based Auth.

Last Supplicant/Client Info :

Information about the last supplicant/client that attempted to authenticate. This

information is available for the following administrative states:

Port-based 802.1X

Single 802.1X

Multi 802.1X

MAC-based Auth.

Selected Counters

Selected Counters :

The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is in one of the following administrative

states:

Multi 802.1X

MAC-based Auth.

The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table, and will be empty if no

MAC address is currently selected. To populate the table, select one of the attached MAC

Addresses from the table below.

Attached MAC Addresses

Identity :

Shows the identity of the supplicant, as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame.

Clicking the link causes the supplicant's EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in

the Selected Counters table. If no supplicants are attached, it shows No supplicants

attached.

This column is not available for MAC-based Auth.

MAC Address :

For Multi 802.1X, this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant.For

MAC-based Auth., this column holds the MAC address of the attached client.

Clicking the link causes the client's Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected

Counters table. If no clients are attached, it shows No clients attached.

280 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

280 280

VLAN ID :

This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through

the Port Security module.

State :

The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated. In the authenticated state, it is

allowed to forward frames on the port, and in the unauthenticated state, it is blocked. As

long as the backend server hasn't successfully authenticated the client, it is unauthenticated.

If an authentication fails for one or the other reason, the client will remain in the

unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds.

Last Authentication :

Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client (successful as well as

unsuccessful).

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

281 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

281 281

3-5.2.3 ACL Status

The section describes how to shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes

the ACE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to

hardware limitations. The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch.

Web Interface

To display the ACL status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, Network and ACL status

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the ACL Status

Figure 3-5.2.3: The ACL Status

Parameter description:

User :

Indicates the ACL user.

Ingress Port :

Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:

All: The ACE will match any ingress port.

Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.

Frame Type :

Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:

Any: The ACE will match any frame type.

EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will

not get matched by IP and ARP frames.

ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.

IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.

IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.

IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.

IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.

282 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

282 282

IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.

IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP / UDP / TCP.

IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.

Action :

Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.

Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.

Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.

Filter: Frames matching the ACE are filtered.

Rate Limiter :

Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When Disabled is

displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.

Port Redirect :

Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are copied to the

port number. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number. When Disabled is

displayed, the port copy operation is disabled.

CPU :

Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.

CPU Once :

Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.

Counter :

The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.

Conflict :

Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE. The specific ACE is not applied to the

hardware due to hardware limitations.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

283 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

283 283

3-5.2.4 ARP Inspection

The section describes to configure the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch.

The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries, and is sorted first by port, then

by VLAN ID, then by MAC address, and then by IP address.

Web Interface

To display the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Security, Network, ARP Inspection.

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

4. Specify the Start from port, VLAN ID, MAC Address, IP Address, and entries per page.

Figure 3-5.2.4: The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table

Parameter description:

ARP Inspection Table Columns

Port :

Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.

VLAN ID :

VLAN-ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted.

MAC Address :

User MAC address of the entry.

IP Address :

User IP address of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

284 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

284 284

:

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.

:

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

285 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

285 285

3-5.2.5 IP Source Guard

Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic IP Source

Guard Table is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID, then by IP address, and then by MAC

address.

Web Interface

To display the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Security, Network and IP Source Guard.

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

4. Specify the Start from port, VLAN ID, IP Address, and entries per page.

Figure 3-5.2.5: The Dynamic IP Source Table

Parameter description:

IP Source Guard Table Columns

Port :

Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.

VLAN ID :

VLAN-ID in which the IP traffic is permitted.

IP Address :

User IP address of the entry.

MAC Address :

Source MAC address.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

:

286 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

286 286

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.

:

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

3-5.3 AAA

3-5.3.1 RADIUS Overview

This section shows you an overview of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers

status to ensure the function is workable.

Web Interface

To display the RADIUS Overview Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Security, AAA and RADIUS Overview.

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-5.3.1: The RADIUS Server Status Overview

Parameter description:

RADIUS Authentication Servers

# :

The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.

IP Address :

The IP address and UDP port number (in : notation) of this server.

287 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

287 287

State :

The current state of the server. This field takes one of the following values:

Disabled: The server is disabled.

Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.

Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module

is ready to accept access attempts.

Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within

the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled

when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in

parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.

RADIUS Accounting Servers

# :

The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.

IP Address :

The IP address and UDP port number (in : notation) of this server.

State :

The current state of the server. This field takes one of the following values:

Disabled: The server is disabled.

Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.

Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module

is ready to accept accounting attempts.

Dead (X seconds left): Accounting attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply

within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get

re-enabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is

displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.

288 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

288 288

3-5.3.2 RADIUS Details

This section shows you a detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server.

Web Interface

To display the RADIUS Details Configuration in the web interface:

1. Specify Port which want to check.

2. Click Security, AAA, RADIUS Overview.

3. Checked Auto-refresh.

4. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics or clear all information when you click

Clear & Fresh.

Figure 3-5.3.2: The RADIUS Authentication Statistics Server

Parameter description:

RADIUS Authentication Statistics

The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 - RADIUS Authentication Client

MIB.Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.

Packet Counters :

289 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

289 289

RADIUS authentication server packet counter. There are seven receive and four transmit

counters

Other Info :

This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip

time.

RADIUS Accounting Statistics

The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 - RADIUS Accounting Client MIB.

Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.

Packet Counters :

RADIUS accounting server packet counter. There are five receive and four transmit counters.

Other Info :

This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round-trip

time.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear :

Clears the counters for the selected server. The "Pending Requests" counter will not be

cleared by this operation.

290 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

290 290

3-5.4 Switch

3-5.4.1 RMON

3-5.4.1.1 Statistics

This section provides an overview of RMON Statistics entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries

from the Statistics table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field.

When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the

Statistics table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Statistics

table.

Web Interface

To display the RMON Statistics in the web interface:

1. Click Security, Switch, RMON and Statistics.

2. Specify Port which want to check.

3. Checked Auto-refresh.

4. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-5.4.1.1: The RMON Statistics Status Overview

Parameter description:

ID :

Indicates the index of Statistics entry.

Data Source(if Index) :

The port ID which wants to be monitored.

Drop :

The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of

resources.

Octets :

The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network.

Pkts :

The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast

291 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

291 291

packets) received.

Broad-cast :

The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.

Multi-cast :

The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.

CRC Errors :

The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but

including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame

Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a

non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Under-size :

The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.

Over-size :

The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.

Frag. :

The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.

Jabb. :

The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.

Coll. :

The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

64 :

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length.

65~127 :

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 to 127

octets in length.

128~255 :

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 to 255

octets in length.

256~511 :

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 to 511

octets in length.

512~1023 :

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 to

1023 octets in length.

1024~1588 :

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 to

1588 octets in length.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

292 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

292 292

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

:

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Statistics table, i.e. the entry with the

lowest ID

:

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

293 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

293 293

3-5.4.1.2 History

This section provides an overview of RMON History entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries

from the History table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field.

When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the History

table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest History Index and Sample Index found

in the History table.

Web Interface

To display the RMON history Configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Security, Switch, RMON and History.

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics or clear all information when you click

Clear.

Figure 3-5.4.1.2: RMON History Overview

Parameter description:

History Index :

Indicates the index of History control entry.

Sample Index :

Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry.

Sample Start :

The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.

Drop :

The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of

resources.

Octets :

The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network.

Pkts :

The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast

packets) received.

Broadcast :

The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.

294 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

294 294

Multicast :

The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.

CRCErrors :

The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but

including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame

Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a

non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).

Undersize :

The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.

Oversize :

The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.

Frag. :

The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.

Jabb. :

The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.

Coll. :

The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

Utilization :

The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this

sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

:

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Statistics table, i.e. the entry with the

lowest ID

:

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

295 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

295 295

3-5.4.1.3 Alarm

This page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries from

the Alarm table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first

visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Alarm table. The first

displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table

Web Interface

To display the RMON Alarm Overview in the web interface:

1. Specify Port which wants to check.

2. Click Security, Switch, RMON and Alarm.

3. Checked Auto-refresh.

4. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-5.4.1.3: RMON Alarm Overview

Parameter description:

ID :

Indicates the index of Alarm control entry.

Interval :

Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling

threshold.

Variable :

Indicates the particular variable to be sampled

Sample Type :

The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared

against the thresholds.

Value :

The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.

Startup Alarm :

The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid.

Rising Threshold :

Rising threshold value.

Rising Index :

296 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

296 296

Rising event index.

Falling Threshold :

Falling threshold value.

Falling Index :

Falling event index.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

:

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Statistics table, i.e. the entry with the

lowest ID

:

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

297 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

297 297

3-5.4.1.4 Event

This page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries.Each page shows up to 99 entries

from the Event table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field.

When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Event

table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in

the Event table.

Web Interface

To display the RMON Event Overview in the web interface:

1. Click Security, Switch, RMON and Event.

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics

4. Specify Port which wants to check.

Figure 3-5.4.1.4: RMON Event Overview

Parameter description:

Event Index :

Indicates the index of the event entry.

Log Index :

Indicates the index of the log entry.

LogTIme :

Indicates Event log time

LogDescription :

Indicates the Event description.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

:

298 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

298 298

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Statistics table, i.e. the entry with the

lowest ID

:

Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

299 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

299 299

3-6 LACP

3-6.1 System Status

This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it

provides a status overview for all LACP instances

Web Interface

To display the LACP System status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, LACP and System Status

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-6.1 The LACP System Status

Parameter description:

Aggr ID :

The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance. For LLAG the id is shown as

'isid: aggr-id' and for GLAGs as 'aggr-id'

Partner System ID :

The system ID (MAC address) of the aggregation partner.

Partner Key :

The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID.

Last changed :

The time since this aggregation changed.

Local Ports :

Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch. The format is: "Switch

ID:Port".

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

300 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

300 300

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

301 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

301 301

3-6.2 Port Status

This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it

provides a Port Status overview for all LACP instances

Web Interface

To display the LACP Port status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, LACP and Port Status

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Port Status.

Figure 3-6.2: The LACP Status

Parameter description:

Port :

The switch port number.

LACP :

'Yes' means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up. 'No' means that LACP is not

enabled or that the port link is down. 'Backup' means that the port could not join the

aggregation group but will join if other port leaves. Meanwhile it's LACP status is disabled.

Key :

The key assigned to this port. Only ports with the same key can aggregate together.

Aggr ID :

The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group. IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs

3-14 are LLAGs.

Partner System ID :

The partner's System ID (MAC address).

Partner Port :

The partner's port number connected to this port.

Partner Prio:

The partner's port priority.

Buttons

302 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

302 302

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields.

303 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

303 303

3-6.3 Port Statistics

This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it

provides a Port Statistics overview for all LACP instances

Web Interface

To display the LACP Port status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, LACP and Port Statistics

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh.

3. 3. Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Statistics.

Figure 3-6.3: The LACP Statistics

Parameter description:

Port :

The switch port number.

LACP Received :

Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port.

LACP Transmitted :

Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port.

Discarded :

Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear :

304 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

304 304

Clears the counters for all ports.

3-7 Loop Protection

This section displays the loop protection port status the ports of the currently selected switch.

Web Interface

To display the Loop Protection status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor and Loop Protection

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Statistics.

Figure 3-7: Loop Protection Status

Parameter description:

Port :

The switch port number of the logical port.

Action :

The currently configured port action.

Transmit :

The currently configured port transmit mode.

Loops :

The number of loops detected on this port.

Status :

The current loop protection status of the port.

Loop :

Whether a loop is currently detected on the port.

Time of Last Loop :

The time of the last loop event detected.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

305 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

305 305

Click to refresh the page.

306 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

306 306

3-8 Spanning Tree

3-8.1 Bridge Status

After you complete the MSTI Port configuration then you could to ask the switch display the

Bridge Status. The Section provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances. The displayed

table contains a row for each STP bridge instance, where the column displays the following

information:

Web Interface

To display the STP Bridges status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, Spanning Tree and Bridge Status.

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges.

4. Click CIST to next page STP Detailed Bridge Status.

Figure 3-8.1: The STP Bridges status

Parameter description:

MSTI :

The Bridge Instance. This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status.

Bridge ID :

The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance.

Root ID :

The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge.

Root Port :

The switch port currently assigned the root port role.

Root Cost :

Root Path Cost. For the Root Bridge it is zero. For all other Bridges, it is the sum of the Port

Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge.

Topology Flag :

The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance.

Topology Change Last :

The time since last Topology Change occurred.

307 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

307 307

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

308 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

308 308

3-8.2 Port Status

After you complete the STP configuration then you could to ask the switch display the STP Port

Status. The Section provides you to ask switch to display the STP CIST port status for physical

ports of the currently selected switch.

Web Interface

To display the STP Port status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, Spanning Tree and Port Status.

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges.

Figure 3-8.2: The STP Port status

Parameter description:

Port :

The switch port number of the logical STP port.

CIST Role :

The current STP port role of the CIST port. The port role can be one of the following values:

AlternatePort, Backup Port, RootPort, DesignatedPort Disabled.

CIST State :

The current STP port state of the CIST port. The port state can be one of the following values:

Blocking Learning Forwarding.

Uptime :

The time since the bridge port was last initialized.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

309 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

309 309

3-8.3 Port Statistics

After you complete the STP configuration then you could to let the switch display the STP

Statistics. The Section provides you to ask switch to display the STP Statistics detail counters of

bridge ports in the currently selected switch.

Web Interface

To display the STP Port status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, Spanning Tree and Port Statistics

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges.

Figure 3-8.3: The STP Statistics

Parameter description:

Port :

The switch port number of the logical STP port.

MSTP :

The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.

RSTP :

The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.

STP :

The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.

TCN :

The number of (legacy) Topology Change Notification BPDU's received/transmitted on the

port.

Discarded Unknown :

The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.

Discarded Illegal :

The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

310 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

310 310

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear :

Click to reset the counters.

311 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

311 311

3-9 MVR

3-9.1 Statistics

The section describes the switch will display the MVR detail Statistics after you had configured

MVR on the switch. It provides the detail MVR Statistics Information

Web Interface

To display the MVR Statistics Information in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, MVR and Statistics

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. To click the Refresh to refresh an entry of the MVR Statistics Information.

Figure 3-9.1: The MVR Statistics Information

Parameter description:

VLAN ID :

The Multicast VLAN ID.

IGMP/MLD Queries Received :

The number of Received Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.

IGMP/MLD Queries Transmitted :

The number of Transmitted Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.

IGMPv1 Joins Received :

The number of Received IGMPv1 Join's.

IGMPv2/MLDv1 Report's Received :

The number of Received IGMPv2 Join's and MLDv1 Report's, respectively.

IGMPv3/MLDv2 Report's Received :

The number of Received IGMPv1 Join's and MLDv2 Report's, respectively.

IGMPv2/MLDv1 Leave's Received :

The number of Received IGMPv2 Leave's and MLDv1 Done's, respectively.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

312 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

312 312

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page.

Clear :

Click to reset the counters

313 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

313 313

3-9.2 MVR Channels Groups

The section describes user could display the MVR Groups detail information on the switch.

Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page. The MVR Group Table is sorted first by

VLAN ID, and then by group

Web Interface

To display the MVR Groups Information in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, MVR and Groups Information

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. To click the Refresh to refresh an entry of the MVR Groups Information.

4. Click << or >> to move to previous or next entry.

Figure 3-9.2: The MVR Groups Information

Parameter description:

MVR Channels (Groups) Information Table Columns

VLAN ID :

VLAN ID of the group.

Groups :

Group ID of the group displayed.

Port Members :

Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear :

Flushes the selected log entries.

314 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

314 314

:

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Channels (Groups) Information

Table.

:

Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.

315 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

315 315

3-9.3 MVR SFM Information

The MVR SFM (Source-Filtered Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM

(Source-Specific Multicast) information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group,

and then by Port. Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single

entry.

Web Interface

To display the MVR SFM Information in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, MVR and MVR SFM Information

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. To click the Refresh to refresh an entry of the MVR Groups Information.

4. Click << or >> to move to previous or next entry.

Figure 3-9.2: The MVR SFM Information

Parameter description:

MVR SFM Information Table Columns

VLAN ID :

VLAN ID of the group.

Group :

Group address of the group displayed.

Port :

Switch port number.

Mode :

Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It

can be either Include or Exclude.

Source Address :

IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses for

filtering to be 128. When there is no any source filtering address, the text "None" is shown in

the Source Address field.

Type :

Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.

316 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

316 316

Hardware Filter/Switch :

Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source

IPv4/IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

:

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MVR Channels (Groups) Information

Table.

:

Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.

317 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

317 317

3-10 IPMC

3-10.1 IGMP Snooping

3-10.1.1 Status

After you complete the IGMP Snooping configuration, then you could to let the switch display

the IGMP Snooping Status. The Section provides you to let switch to display the IGMP

Snooping detail status.

Web Interface

To display the IGMP Snooping status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, IGMP Snooping and Status

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the IGMP Snooping Status.

4. Click Clear to clear the IGMP Snooping Status.

Figure 3-10.1.1: The IGMP Snooping Status.

Parameter description:

VLAN ID :

The VLAN ID of the entry.

Querier Version :

Working Querier Version currently.

Host Version :

Working Host Version currently.

318 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

318 318

Querier Status :

Shows the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".

"DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.

Queries Transmitted :

The number of Transmitted Queries.

Queries Received :

The number of Received Queries.

V1 Reports Received :

The number of Received V1 Reports.

V2 Reports Received :

The number of Received V2 Reports.

V3 Reports Received :

The number of Received V3 Reports.

V2 Leaves Received :

The number of Received V2 Leaves.

Router Port :

Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that

leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.

Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.

Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port.

Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.

Port :

Switch port number.

Status :

Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear :

Clears all Statistics counters.

319 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

319 319

3-10.1.2 Group Information

After you complete to set the IGMP Snooping function then you could let the switch to display

the IGMP Snooping Group Information. Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this

page. The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group. The will use the last

entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached

the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.

Web Interface

To display the IGMP Snooping Group Information in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, IGMP Snooping, Group Information

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the IGMP Snooping Groups Information.

4. Click << or >> to move to previous or next entry.

Figure 3-10.1.2: The IGMP Snooping Groups Information.

Parameter description:

IGMP Group Table Columns

VLAN ID :

VLAN ID of the group.

Groups :

Group address of the group displayed.

Port Members :

Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

320 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

320 320

:

Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

:

Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.

321 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

321 321

3-10.1.3 IPv4 SFM Information

Entries in the IGMP SFM Information Table are shown on this page. The IGMP SFM

(Source-Filtered Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast)

information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port. Different

source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry.

Web Interface

To display the IPv4 SSM Information in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, IGMP Snooping, IPv4 SSM Information

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the IPv4 SFM Information.

4. Click << or >> to move to previous or next entry.

Figure 3-10.1.3: The IPv4 SFM Information.

Parameter description:

IGMP SFM Information Table Columns

VLAN ID :

VLAN ID of the group.

Group :

Group address of the group displayed.

Port :

Switch port number.

Mode :

Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It

can be either Include or Exclude.

Source Address :

IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses for

filtering to be 128.

Type :

Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.

Hardware Filter/Switch

322 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

322 322

Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv4

address could be handled by chip or not.

Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

:

Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

:

Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.

323 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

323 323

3-10.2 MLD Snooping

3-10.2.1 Status

The section describes when you complete the MLD Snooping and how to display the MLD

Snooping Status and detail information. It will help you to find out the detail information of

MLD Snooping status.

Web Interface

To display the MLD Snooping Status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, MLD Snooping and Status.

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping Status Information.

4. Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Status.

Figure 3-10.2.1: The MLD Snooping Status

Parameter description:

VLAN ID :

The VLAN ID of the entry.

Querier Version :

Working Querier Version currently.

Host Version :

Working Host Version currently.

Querier Status :

Show the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".

"DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.

Queries Transmitted :

324 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

324 324

The number of Transmitted Queries.

Queries Received :

The number of Received Queries.

V1 Reports Received :

The number of Received V1 Reports.

V2 Reports Received :

The number of Received V2 Reports.

V1 Leaves Received :

The number of Received V1 Leaves.

Router Port :

Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that

leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier.

Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.

Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port.

Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.

Port :

Switch port number.

Status :

Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear :

Clears all Statistics counters.

325 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

325 325

3-10.2.2 Group Information

The section describes user could set the MLD Snooping Groups Information. The "Start from

VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group

Table

Web Interface

To display the MLD Snooping Group information in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, MLD Snooping and Group Information

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh

3. Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping Group Information.

4. Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Groups information..

Figure 3-10.2.2: The MLD Snooping Groups Information

Parameter description:

MLD Snooping Information Table Columns

VLAN ID :

VLAN ID of the group.

Groups :

Group address of the group displayed.

Port Members :

Ports under this group.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

:

Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

326 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

326 326

:

Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.

327 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

327 327

3-10.2.3 IPv6 SFM Information

Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this page. The MLD SFM

(Source-Filtered Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast)

information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port. Different

source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry.

Web Interface

To display the MLDv2 IPv6 SSM Information in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, MLD Snooping and IPv6 SFM Information.

2. If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLDv2 IPv6 SSM Information.

4. Click << or >> to move to previous or next entry.

Figure 3-10.2.3: The IPv6 SFM Information

Parameter description:

MLD SFM Information Table Columns

VLAN ID :

VLAN ID of the group.

Group :

Group address of the group displayed.

Port :

Switch port number.

Mode :

Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It

can be either Include or Exclude.

Source Address :

IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses for

filtering to be 128.

Type :

Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.

Hardware Filter/Switch :

328 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

328 328

Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv6

address could be handled by chip or not.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

:

Updates the table, starting with the first entry in the IGMP Group Table.

:

Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.

329 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

329 329

3-11 LLDP

3-11.1 Neighbour

This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbours. The displayed table contains a

row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected. The columns hold the following

information

Web Interface

To display the LLDP neighbours:

1. Click Monitor, LLDP and Neighbours.

2. Click Refresh for manual update web screen

3. Click Auto-refresh for auto-update web screen

Figure 3-11.1: The LLDP Neighbours information

NOTE: If your network without any device supports LLDP then the

table will show No LLDP neighbour information found.

Parameter description:

Local Port :

The port on which the LLDP frame was received.

Chassis ID :

The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbour's LLDP frames.

Port ID :

The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbour port.

Port Description :

Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbour unit.

System Name :

System Name is the name advertised by the neighbour unit.

System Capabilities :

System Capabilities describes the neighbour unit's capabilities. The possible capabilities are:

1. Other

2. Repeater

3. Bridge

330 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

330 330

4. WLAN Access Point

5. Router

6. Telephone

7. DOCSIS cable device

8. Station only

9. Reserved

When a capability is enabled, the capability is followed by (+). If the capability is disabled,

the capability is followed by (-).

Management Address :

Management Address is the neighbour unit's address that is used for higher layer entities to

assist discovery by the network management. This could for instance hold the neighbour's

IP address.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

331 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

331 331

3-11.2 LLDP-MED Neighbour

This page provides a status overview of all LLDP-MED neighbours. The displayed table contains

a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected. This function applies to VoIP

devices which support LLDP-MED. The columns hold the following information:

Web Interface

To display the LLDP-MED neighbor:

1. Click Monitor, LLDP and LLDP-MED Neighbor.

2. Click Refresh for manual update web screen

3. Click Auto-refresh for auto-update web screen

Figure 3-11.2: The LLDP-MED Neighbours information

NOTE: If your network without any device supports LLDP-MED

then the table will show No LLDP-MED neighbour information

found.

Parameter description:

Port :

The port on which the LLDP frame was received.

Device Type :

LLDP-MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types: Network Connectivity

Devices and Endpoint Devices.

LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device Definition

LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, provide access to the IEEE

802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices. An LLDP-MED Network

Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies:

1. LAN Switch/Router

2. IEEE 802.1 Bridge

3. IEEE 802.3 Repeater (included for historical reasons)

4. IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point

5. Any device that supports the IEEE 802.1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA-1057 and

can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method.

LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Definition :

LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, are located at the IEEE 802 LAN

network edge, and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP-MED framework.

332 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

332 332

Within the LLDP-MED Endpoint Device category, the LLDP-MED scheme is broken into

further Endpoint Device Classes, as defined in the following.

Each LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for

the previous Endpoint Device Class. For-example will any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device

claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint (Class II) also support all aspects of TIA-1057

applicable to Generic Endpoints (Class I), and any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming

compliance as a Communication Device (Class III) will also support all aspects of TIA-1057

applicable to both Media Endpoints (Class II) and Generic Endpoints (Class I).

LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I) :

The LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I) definition is applicable to all endpoint products

that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA-1057, however do not support

IP media or act as an end-user communication appliance. Such devices may include (but are

not limited to) IP Communication Controllers, other communication related servers, or any

device requiring basic services as defined in TIA-1057.

Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration, device location, network

policy, power management, and inventory management.

LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II) :

The LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II) definition is applicable to all endpoint products

that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end

user. Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint

Class (Class I), and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming. Example

product categories expected to adhere to this class include (but are not limited to) Voice /

Media Gateways, Conference Bridges, Media Servers, and similar.

Discovery services defined in this class include media-type-specific network layer policy

discovery.

LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III) :

The LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III) definition is applicable to all endpoint

products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media. Capabilities

include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint (Class I) and Media

Endpoint (Class II) classes, and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices.

Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include (but are not limited to)

end user communication appliances, such as IP Phones, PC-based softphones, or other

communication appliances that directly support the end user.

Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier (including ECS

/ E911 information), embedded L2 switch support, inventory management.

LLDP-MED Capabilities :

LLDP-MED Capabilities describes the neighborhood unit's LLDP-MED capabilities. The

possible capabilities are:

1. LLDP-MED capabilities

2. Network Policy

3. Location Identification

4. Extended Power via MDI - PSE

5. Extended Power via MDI - PD

6. Inventory

7. Reserved

333 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

333 333

Application Type :

Application Type indicating the primary function of the application(s) defined for this

network policy, advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device. The possible

application types are shown below.

1. Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances

supporting interactive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate

VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.

2. Voice Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the

voice signalling than for the voice media.

3. Guest Voice - to support a separate limited feature-set voice service for guest users and

visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting

interactive voice services.

4. Guest Voice Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for

the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media.

5. Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, such

as PCs or laptops.

6. Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other

similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.

7. Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and

other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network

policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended

use of this application type.

8. Video Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the

video signalling than for the video media.

Policy :

Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is

required by the device. Can be either Defined or Unknown

Unknown: The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown.

Defined: The network policy is defined.

TAG :

TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged

VLAN. Can be Tagged or Untagged.

Untagged: The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag

header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.

Tagged: The device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format.

VLAN ID :

VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003. A value of

1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID. A value of 0 (Priority Tagged) is used if the

device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003, meaning that only

the IEEE 802.1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used

instead.

Priority :

Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type.One of the eight

priority levels (0 through 7).

334 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

334 334

DSCP :

DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified

application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. Contain one of 64 code point values (0

through 63).

Auto-negotiation :

Auto-negotiation identifies if MAC/PHY auto-negotiation is supported by the link partner.

Auto-negotiation status :

Auto-negotiation status identifies if auto-negotiation is currently enabled at the link partner.

If Auto-negotiation is supported and Auto-negotiation status is disabled, the 802.3 PMD

operating mode will be determined the operational MAU type field value rather than by

auto-negotiation.

Auto-negotiation Capabilities :

Auto-negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC/PHY capabilities.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

335 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

335 335

3-11.3 PoE

This page allows the user to inspect the current status for all PoE ports. The section show all port

Power Over Ethernet Status.

Web Interface

To display the LLDP Neighbor Power Over Ethernet information:

1. Click Monitor ,LLDP, PoE

2. Display Power Over Ethernet Status Information

3. Click Auto-refresh for auto-update web screen

Figure 3-12.3: The LLDP Neighbors EEE information

Parameter description:

Local Port :

The port for this switch on which the LLDP frame was received.

Power Type :

The Power Type represents whether the device is a Power Sourcing Entity (PSE) or Power

Device (PD).

If the Power Type is unknown it is represented as "Reserved".

Power Source :

The Power Source represents the power source being utilized by a PSE or PD device.

If the device is a PSE device it can either run on its Primary Power Source or its Backup

Power Source. If it is unknown whether the PSE device is using its Primary Power Source or

its Backup Power Source it is indicated as "Unknown"

If the device is a PD device it can either run on its local power supply or it can use the PSE as

power source. It can also use both its local power supply and the PSE.

If it is unknown what power supply the PD device is using it is indicated as "Unknown"

Power Priority :

Power Priority represents the priority of the PD device, or the power priority associated with

the PSE type device's port that is sourcing the power. There are three levels of power priority.

The three levels are: Critical, High and Low.

If the power priority is unknown it is indicated as "Unknown"

Maximum Power :

The Maximum Power Value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in

watts required by a PD device from a PSE device, or the minimum power a PSE device is

capable of sourcing over a maximum length cable based on its current configuration.

336 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

336 336

The maximum allowed value is 102.3 W. If the device indicates value higher than 102.3 W, it

is represented as "reserved"

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

337 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

337 337

3-11.4 EEE

By using EEE power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency. This latency

occurs due to that the circuits EEE turn off to save power, need time to boot up before sending

traffic over the link. This time is called "wakeup time". To achieve minimal latency, devices can

use LLDP to exchange information about their respective tx and rx "wakeup time ", as a way to

agree upon the minimum wakeup time they need.

This page provides an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP.

Web Interface

To display the LLDP EEE neighbors:

1. Click Monitor, LLDP then click EEE to show discover EEE devices.

2. Click Refresh for manual update web screen.

3. Click Auto-refresh for auto-update web screen.

Figure 3-11.4: The LLDP Neighbors EEE information

NOTE: If your network without any devices which enables EEE

function then the table will show No LLDP EEE information found.

Parameter description:

LLDP Neighbors EEE Information

The displayed table contains a row for each port. The columns hold the following

information:

Local Port :

The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.

Tx Tw :

The link partners maximum time that transmit path can hold off sending data after

reassertion of LPI.

Rx Tw :

The link partners time that receiver would like the transmitter to hold off to allow time for

the receiver to wake from sleep.

Fallback Receive Tw :

The link partners fallback receive Tw.

A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw_sys_tx. Since a

receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings, this provides the transmitter

338 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

338 338

with additional information that it may use for a more efficient allocation. Systems that do

not implement this option default the value to be the same as that of the Receive Tw_sys_tx.

Echo Tx Tw :

The link partner's Echo Tx Tw value.

The respective echo values shall be defined as the local link partners reflection (echo) of the

remote link partners respective values. When a local link partner receives its echoed values

from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not the remote link partner has

received, registered and processed its most recent values. For example, if the local link

partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its local MIB, then the

local link partner infers that the remote link partners request was based on stale

information.

Echo Rx Tw :

The link partner's Echo Rx Tw value.

Resolved Tx Tw :

The resolved Tx Tw for this link. Note: NOT the link partner

The resolved value that is the actual "tx wakeup time used for this link (based on EEE

information exchanged via LLDP).

Resolved Rx Tw :

The resolved Rx Tw for this link. Note: NOT the link partner

The resolved value that is the actual "tx wakeup time used for this link (based on EEE

information exchanged via LLDP).

EEE in Sync :

Shows whether the switch and the link partner have agreed on wake times.

Red - Switch and link partner have not agreed on wakeup times.

Green - Switch and link partner have agreed on wakeup times.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

339 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

339 339

3-11.5 Port Statistics

Two types of counters are shown. Global counters are counters that refer to the whole switch,

while local counters refer to per port counters for the currently selected switch

Web Interface

To display the LLDP Statistics:

1. Click Monitor ,LLDP, then click Port Statistics to show LLDP counters

2. Click Refresh for manual update web screen

3. Click Auto-refresh for auto-update web screen

4. Click Clear to clear all counters

Figure 3-11.5: The LLDP Port Statistics information

Parameter description:

Global Counters

Neighbour entries were last changed at :

It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added. It also shows the time

elapsed since the last change was detected.

Total Neighbours Entries Added :

Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot.

Total Neighbours Entries Deleted :

Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot.

Total Neighbours Entries Dropped :

Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full.

340 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

340 340

Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out :

Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.

Local Counters

The displayed table contains a row for each port. The columns hold the following

information:

Local Port :

The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.

Tx Frames :

The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port.

Rx Frames :

The number of LLDP frames received on the port.

Rx Errors :

The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.

Frames Discarded :

If an LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has run full, the LLDP

frame is counted and discarded. This situation is known as "Too Many Neighbours" in the

LLDP standard. LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote

Port ID is not already contained within the table. Entries are removed from the table when a

given port's link is down, an LLDP shutdown frame is received, or when the entry ages out.

TLVs Discarded :

Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs (TLV is short for

"Type Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted and discarded.

TLVs Unrecognized :

The number of well-formed TLVs, but with an unknown type value.

Org. Discarded :

The number of organizationally received TLVs.

Age-Outs :

Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid

(age-out time). If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time, the LLDP

information is removed, and the Age-Out counter is incremented.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear :

Clears the local counters. All counters (including global counters) are cleared upon reboot.

341 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

341 341

3-12 PoE

This page allows the user to inspect the current status for all PoE ports.

Web Interface

To Display Power Over Ethernet Statistics in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, PoE

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-12: The PoE Statistics

Parameter description:

Local Port :

This is the logical port number for this row.

PD Class :

Each PD is classified according to a class that defines the maximum power the PD will use.

The PD Class shows the PDs class.

Five Classes are defined:

Class 0: Max. power 15.4 W

Class 1: Max. power 4.0 W

Class 2: Max. power 7.0 W

Class 3: Max. power 15.4 W

Class 4: Max. power 30.0 W

Power Requested :

The Power Requested shows the requested amount of power the PD wants to be reserved.

Power Allocated :

The Power Allocated shows the amount of power the switch has allocated for the PD.

Power Used :

The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using.

Current Used :

342 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

342 342

The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using.

Priority :

The Priority shows the port's priority configured by the user.

Port Status :

The Port Status shows the port's status. The status can be one of the following values:

PoE not available - No PoE chip found - PoE not supported for the port.

PoE turned OFF - PoE disabled : PoE is disabled by user.

PoE turned OFF - Power budget exceeded - The total requested or used power by the PDs

exceeds the maximum power the Power Supply can deliver, and port(s) with the lowest

priority is/are powered down.

No PD detected - No PD detected for the port.

PoE turned OFF - PD overload - The PD has requested or used more power than the port

can deliver, and is powered down.

PoE turned OFF - PD is off.

Invalid PD - PD detected, but is not working correctly.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

343 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

343 343

3-13 MAC Table

Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page. The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries,

and is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by MAC address.

Web Interface

To Display MAC Address Table in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, Dynamic MAC Table.

2. Specify the VLAN and MAC Address.

3. Display MAC Address Table.

Figure 3-13: The MAC Address Table

Parameter description:

MAC Table Columns

Switch (stack only) :

The stack unit where the entry is learned.

Type :

Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry.

VLAN :

The VLAN ID of the entry.

MAC address :

The MAC address of the entry.

Port Members :

The ports that are members of the entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input

fields.

344 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

344 344

Clear :

Flushes the selected log entries.

:

Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table, i.e. the entry with the

lowest VLAN ID and MAC address

:

Updates the system log entries, ending at the last entry currently displayed.

NOTE:

00-40-C7-73-01-29 : your switch MAC address (for IPv4)

33-33-00-00-00-01 : Destination MAC (for IPv6 Router Advertisement)

(reference IPv6 RA.JPG)

33-33-00-00-00-02 : Destination MAC (for IPv6 Router Solicitation)

(reference IPv6 RS.JPG)

33-33-FF-73-01-29 : Destination MAC (for IPv6 Neighbor Solicitation)

(reference IPv6 DAD.JPG)

33-33-FF-A8-01-01: your switch MAC address (for IPv6 global IP)

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF: for Broadcast.

345 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

345 345

3-14 VLANs

3-14.1 Membership

This page provides an overview of membership status of VLAN users.

Web Interface

To display the VLAN membership configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, VLANs and VLAN membership.

2. Scroll the bar to choice which VLANs would like to show up.

3. Click Refresh to update the state.

Figure 3-14.1: VLAN Membership Status for Combined users

Parameter description:

VLAN USER :

Various internal software modules may use VLAN services to configure VLAN memberships

on the fly.

The drop-down list on the right allows for selecting between showing VLAN memberships

as configured by an administrator (Admin) or as configured by one of these internal

software modules.

The "Combined" entry will show a combination of the administrator and internal software

modules configuration, and basically reflects what is actually configured in hardware.

VLAN ID :

VLAN ID for which the Port members are displayed.

Port Members :

A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID.

If a port is included in a VLAN, an image will be displayed.

If a port is included in a Forbidden port list, an image will be displayed.

If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on same

Forbidden port, then conflict port will be displayed as .

VLAN Membership

The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all

VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User (selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box).

When ALL VLAN Users are selected, it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users,

and this is by default. VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be

346 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

346 346

forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input

fields.

Combined :

Select VLAN Users from this drop down list.

347 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

347 347

3-14.2 Port

The function Port Status gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the order

of Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined.

Web Interface

To Display VLAN Port Status in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, VLAN and Port Status.

2. Specify the Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined.

3. Display Port Status information.

Figure 3-14.2: The VLAN Port Status for Static user

Parameter description:

VLAN USER :

VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN

memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID, UVID. Currently we support

following VLAN User types:

CLI/Web/SNMP : These are referred to as static.

NAS : NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communications between a

Supplicant, Authenticator, and an Authentication Server.

MVRP : Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) allows dynamic registration and

deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network.

Voice VLAN : Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating

from IP phones.

MVR : MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in

each VLAN. Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single (multicast) VLAN.

MSTP : The 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol (MSTP) uses VLANs to create multiple

spanning trees in a network, which significantly improves network resource utilization while

maintaining a loop-free environment.

Port :

The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

Port Type :

348 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

348 348

Shows the Port Type. Port type can be any of Unaware, C-port, S-port, Custom S-port.

If Port Type is Unaware, all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not

removed. C-port is Customer Port. S-port is Service port. Custom S-port is S-port with

Custom TPID.

Ingress Filtering :

Shows the ingress filtering on a port. This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If

ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN, the

frame is discarded.

Frame Type :

Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This parameter affects

VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged frames, untagged frames received

on that port are discarded.

Port VLAN ID :

Shows the Port VLAN ID (PVID) that a given user wants the port to have.

The field is empty if not overridden by the selected user.

Tx Tag :

Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged.

UVID :

Shows UVID (untagged VLAN ID). Port's UVID determines the packet's behavior at the

egress side.

Conflicts :

Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or not. When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set

VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration, the following conflicts can occur:

Functional Conflicts between features.

Conflicts due to hardware limitation.

Direct conflict between user modules.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Combined :

Select VLAN Users from this drop down list.

349 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

349 349

3-15 VCL

3-15.1 MAC-based VLAN

This section shows MAC-based VLAN entries configured by various MAC-based VLAN users.

Currently we support following VLAN User types:

CLI/Web/SNMP: These are referred to as static.

NAS: NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communications between a

Supplicant, Authenticator, and an Authentication Server.

Web Interface

To Display MAC-based VLAN configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor and MAC-based VLAN Status.

2. Specify the Static, NAS, Combined.

3. Display MAC-based information.

Figure 3-15.1: The MAC-based VLAN Membership Status for User Static

Parameter description:

MAC Address :

Indicates the MAC address.

VLAN ID :

Indicates the VLAN ID.

Port Members :

Port members of the MAC-based VLAN entry.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

350 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

350 350

3-15.2 Protocol-based VLAN

3-15.2.1 Protocol to Group

This page shows you the protocols to Group Name (unique for each Group) mapping entries

for the switch.

Web Interface

To Display Protocol-based VLAN configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, VCL and Protocol to Group.

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-15.2.1: The protocol to Group for Protocol-based VLAN

Parameter description:

Frame Type :

Frame Type can have one of the following values:

1. Ethernet

2. LLC

3. SNAP

NOTE:

On changing the Frame type field, valid value of the following text

field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected.

Value :

Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the

preceding Frame Type selection menu.

Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types:

1. For Ethernet: Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called

etype. Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600-0xffff

2. For LLC: Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub-values.

a. DSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)

b. SSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)

3. For SNAP: Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub-values.

351 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

351 351

a. OUI: OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) is value in format of xx-xx-xx where each

pair (xx) in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00-0xff.

b. PID: If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000, the protocol ID is the Ethernet type (EtherType)

field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP; if the OUI is an OUI for a particular

organization, the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol

running on top of SNAP.

In other words, if value of OUI field is 00-00-00 then value of PID will be etype

(0x0600-0xffff) and if value of OUI is other than 00-00-00 then valid value of PID will be any

value from 0x0000 to 0xffff.

Group Name :

A valid Group Name is a unique 16-character long string for every entry which consists of a

combination of alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers (0-9).

NOTE:

special character and underscore(_) are not allowed.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

352 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

352 352

3-15.2.2 Group to VLAN

This page shows you the configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch.

Web Interface

To Display Group to VLAN configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, VCL, Group to VLAN.

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-15.2.2: The Group Name to VLAN mapping Table Status

Parameter description:

Group Name :

A valid Group Name is a string at the most 16 characters which consists of a combination of

alphabets (a-z or A-Z) and integers(0-9), no special character is allowed. Whichever Group

name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must

not be pre-used by any other existing mapping entry on this page.

VLAN ID :

Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped. A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1-4095.

Port Members :

A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping.

To include a port in a mapping, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the

mapping, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes

are unchecked.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

353 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

353 353

3-15.3 IP Subnet-based VLAN

The page shows IP subnet-based VLAN entries. This page shows only static entries.

Web Interface

To Display MAC-based VLAN configuration in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor, VCL and IP Subnet-based VLAN.

2. Checked Auto-refresh.

3. Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-15.3: The IP Subnet-based VLAN Membership Status

Parameter description:

VCE ID :

Indicates the index of the entry. It is user configurable. Its value ranges from 0-128. If a VCE

ID is 0, application will auto-generate the VCE ID for that entry. Deletion and lookup of IP

subnet-based VLAN are based on VCE ID.

IP Address :

Indicates the IP address.

Mask Length :

Indicates the network mask length.

VLAN ID :

Indicates the VLAN ID. VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries.

Port Members :

A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet-based VLAN entry. To

include a port in a IP subnet-based VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port

from the IP subnet-based VLAN, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are

members, and all boxes are unchecked.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

354 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

354 354

3-16 sFlow

This session shows receiver and per-port sFlow statistics

Web Interface

To Display port sFlow statistics in the web interface:

1. Click Monitor and sFlow.

2. Display sFlow information.

Figure 3-16: The sFlow Statistics

Parameter description:

Receiver Statistics

Owner :

This field shows the current owner of the sFlow configuration. It assumes one of three values

as follows:

If sFlow is currently unconfigured/unclaimed, Owner contains .

If sFlow is currently configured through Web or CLI, Owner contains

local management>.

If sFlow is currently configured through SNMP, Owner contains a string identifying the

sFlow receiver.`

IP Address/Hostname :

355 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

355 355

The IP address or hostname of the sFlow receiver.

Timeout :

The number of seconds remaining before sampling stops and the current sFlow owner is

released.

Tx Successes :

The number of UDP datagrams successfully sent to the sFlow receiver.

Tx Errors :

The number of UDP datagrams that has failed transmission.

The most common source of errors is invalid sFlow receiver IP/hostname configuration. To

diagnose, paste the receiver's IP address/hostname into the Ping Web page (Diagnostics

Ping/Ping6).

Flow Samples :

The total number of flow samples sent to the sFlow receiver.

Counter Samples :

The total number of counter samples sent to the sFlow receiver.

Port Statistics

Port :

The port number for which the following statistics applies.

Rx and Tx Flow Samples :

The number of flow samples sent to the sFlow receiver originating from this port. Here, flow

samples are divided into Rx and Tx flow samples, where Rx flow samples contains the

number of packets that were sampled upon reception (ingress) on the port and Tx flow

samples contains the number of packets that were sampled upon transmission (egress) on

the port.

Counter Samples :

The total number of counter samples sent to the sFlow receiver originating from this port.

Buttons

Auto-refresh :

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

Refresh :

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Clear Receiver :

Clears the sFlow receiver counters.

Clear Ports :

Clears the per-port counters.

356 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

356 356

Chapter 4 Diagnostics

This chapter provides a set of basic system diagnosis. It let users know that whether

the system is health or needs to be fixed. The basic system check includes ICMP Ping,

Link OAM, ICMPv6, and VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics.

4-1 Ping

This section allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues.

Web Interface

To configure an ICMP PING Configuration in the web interface:

1. Specify ICMP PING IP Address.

2. Specify ICMP PING Size.

3. Click Start.

Figure 4-1: The ICMP Ping

Parameter description:

IP Address :

To set the IP Address of device what you want to ping it.

Ping Length :

The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.

Ping Count :

The count of the ICMP packet. Values range from 1 time to 60 times.

Ping Interval :

The interval of the ICMP packet. Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds.

357 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

357 357

Buttons

Start :

Click the Start button then the switch will start to ping the device using ICMP packet size

what set on the switch.

After you press , 5 ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip

time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until

responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs.

PING6 server ::10.10.132.20

64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=0, time=0ms

64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms

64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=2, time=0ms

64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=3, time=0ms

64 bytes from ::10.10.132.20: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms

Sent 5 packets, received 5 OK, 0 bad

358 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

358 358

4-2 Ping6

This section allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity

issues.

Web Interface

To configure an ICMPv6 PING Configuration in the web interface:

1. Specify ICMPv6 PING IP Address.

2. Specify ICMPv6 PING Size.

3. Click Start.

Figure 4-2: The ICMPv6 Ping

Parameter description:

IP Address :

The destination IP Address with IPv6

Ping Length :

The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.

Ping Count :

The count of the ICMP packet. Values range from 1 time to 60 times.

Ping Interval :

The interval of the ICMP packet. Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds.

Egress Interface (Only for IPv6) :

The VLAN ID (VID) of the specific egress IPv6 interface which ICMP packet goes.

The given VID ranges from 1 to 4094 and will be effective only when the corresponding IPv6 interface

is valid.

When the egress interface is not given, PING6 finds the best match interface for destination.

Do not specify egress interface for loopback address.

Do specify egress interface for link-local or multicast address.

Buttons

Start :

359 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

359 359

Click the Start button then the switch will start to ping the device using ICMPv6 packet size

what set on the switch.

After you press, 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip

time are displayed upon reception of a reply. The page refreshes automatically until

responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs.

PING6 server ff02::2, 56 bytes of data.

64 bytes from fe80::219:5bff:fe2f:b47: icmp_seq=0, time=10ms

64 bytes from fe80::215:58ff:feed:69dd: icmp_seq=0, time=10ms

64 bytes from fe80::219:5bff:fe2f:b47: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms

64 bytes from fe80::215:58ff:feed:69dd: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms

64 bytes from fe80::219:5bff:fe2f:b47: icmp_seq=2, time=0ms

64 bytes from fe80::215:58ff:feed:69dd: icmp_seq=2, time=0ms

64 bytes from fe80::219:5bff:fe2f:b47: icmp_seq=3, time=0ms

64 bytes from fe80::215:58ff:feed:69dd: icmp_seq=3, time=0ms

64 bytes from fe80::219:5bff:fe2f:b47: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms

64 bytes from fe80::215:58ff:feed:69dd: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms

Sent 5 packets, received 10 OK, 0 bad

You can configure the following properties of the issued ICMP packets:

360 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

360 360

4-3 Cable Diagnostics

This page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics for 10/100 and 1G copper ports. Press to

run the diagnostics. This will take approximately 5 seconds. When completed, the page

refreshes automatically, and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table.

Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 - 120 meters with 5-meter

accuracy.

10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running Cable Diagnostics. Therefore, running

Cable Diagnostics on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop

responding until Cable Diagnostics is complete.

Web Interface

To configure Cable Diagnostics in the web interface:

1. Specify each port cable diagnostics.

2. Click Start.

Figure 4-3: The Cable Diagnostics

Parameter description:

Port

The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics.

Copper Port

Copper port number.

Link Status

The status of the cable.

10M:

Cable is link up and correct. Speed is 10Mbps

100M:

Cable is link up and correct. Speed is 100Mbps

1G:

361 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

361 361

Cable is link up and correct. Speed is 1Gbps

Link Down:

Link down or cable is not correct.

Test Result

Test Result of the cable.

OK:

Correctly terminated pair

Abnormal:

Incorrectly terminated pair or link down

Length

The length (in meters) of the cable pair. The resolution is 3 meters. When Link Status is

shown as follow, the length has different definition.

1G:

The length is the minimum value of 4-pair.

10M/100M:

The length is the minimum value of 2-pair.

Link Down:

1The length is the minimum value of non-zero of 4-pair.

Start :

Press this button to run the diagnostics. This will take approximately 5 seconds. If all ports

are selected, this can take approximately 15 seconds. When completed, the page refreshes

automatically, and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table. Note

that Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 - 140 meters.

10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running Cable Diagnostics. Therefore,

running Cable Diagnostics on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to

stop responding until Cable Diagnostics is complete.

362 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

362 362

4-4 Traceroute

This page allows you to issue ICMP, TCP, or UDP packets to diagnose network connectivity

issues.

Web Interface

To configure an ICMPv6 PING Configuration in the web interface:

1. Specify traceroute IP Address.

2. Specify traceroute Size.

3. Click Start.

Figure 4-4: The Traceroute

Parameter description:

Protocol :

The protocol (ICMP, UDP, TCP) packets to send.

IP Address :

The destination IP Address.

Wait Time :

Set the time (in seconds) to wait for a response to a probe (default 5.0 sec). Values range

from 1 to 60. The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.

Max TTL :

Specifies the maximum number of hops (max time-to-live value) traceroute will probe.

Values range from 1 to 255. The default is 30.

Probe Count :

Sets the number of probe packets per hop. Values range from 1 to 10. The default is 3.

Buttons

Start :

Click the Start button then the switch will start to ping the device using ICMPv6 packet size

what set on the switch.

363 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

363 363

After you press, Traceroute sends packets with gradually increasing TTL value, starting with

TTL value of 1. The first router receives the packet, decrements the TTL value and drops the

packet because it then has TTL value zero. The router sends an ICMP Time Exceeded

message back to the source. The next set of packets are given a TTL value of 2, so the first

router forwards the packets, but the second router drops them and replies with ICMP Time

Exceeded. Proceeding in this way, traceroute uses the returned ICMP Time Exceeded

messages to build a list of routers that packets traverse, until the destination is reached and

returns an ICMP Echo Reply message.

traceroute to 202.39.253.11 (202.39.253.11), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets

1 192.168.10.254 ae-2-3508.edge4.Atlanta2.Level3.net. (192.168.10.254) 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms

2 59-125-13-254.HINET-IP.hinet.net. (59.125.13.254) 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms

3 h146.s228.ts.hinet.net. (168.95.228.146) 20 ms 10 ms 20 ms

4 tchn-3011.hinet.net. (220.128.16.194) 20 ms TCHN-3112.hinet.net. (220.128.17.142) 20 ms

tchn-3011.hinet.net. (220.128.16.202) 20 ms

5 TPDT-3012.hinet.net. (220.128.17.6) 20 ms TPDT-3011.hinet.net. (220.128.16.10) 20 ms

TPDT-3012.hinet.net. (220.128.17.6) 40 ms

6 CHCH-3112.hinet.net. (220.128.2.13) 20 ms tchn-3011.hinet.net. (220.128.1.9) 10 ms

CHCH-3112.hinet.net. (220.128.2.13) 30 ms

7 211.22.41.237 CHCH-3112.hinet.net. (211.22.41.237) 20 ms 30 ms 30 ms

8 202-39-253-11.HINET-IP.hinet.net. (202.39.253.11) 10 ms 10 ms

You can configure the following properties:

364 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

364 364

Chapter 5 Maintenance

This chapter describes the entire switch Maintenance configuration tasks to enhance

the performance of local network including Restart Device, Firmware upgrade,

Save/Restore, Import/Export.

5-1 Restart Device

This section describes how to restart switch for any maintenance needs. Any configuration files

or scripts that you saved in the switch should still be available afterwards.

Web Interface

To configure a Restart Device Configuration in the web interface:

1. Chick Restart Device.

2. Click Yes.

Figure 5-1: Restart Device

Parameter description:

Restart Device :

You can restart the switch on this page. After restart, the switch will boot normally.

Buttons

Force Cool Restart :

Uncheck "Force Cool Restart" if you want to perform a warm restart of the switch.

Check "Force Cool Restart" if you want to simulate a power-on (cold restart) of the switch.

WARNING: Forcing a cool restart will affect the traffic going through

the switch.

Yes :

365 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

365 365

Click to restart device

No :

Click to return to the Port State page without restarting.

366 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

366 366

5-2 Reboot Schedule

This page allows user to schedule the time to reboot the switch.

Web Interface

To configure a Reboot Schedule Configuration in the web interface:

1. Chick Maintenance and Reboot Schedule.

2. Click apply to save changes.

Figure 5-2: Reboot Schedule

Parameter description:

Mode :

Indicates the reboot scheduling mode operation. Possible modes are:

Enabled: Enable switch reboot scheduling.

Disabled: Disable switch reboot scheduling.

Week Day :

The day to reboot this switch.

Reboot Time :

The time to reboot the switch.

Buttons

Apply :

Click to save changes.

Reset :

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

367 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

367 367

5-3 Factory Defaults

You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page. Only the IP configuration is retained.

The new configuration is available immediately, which means that no restart is necessary.

Web Interface

To configure a Factory Defaults Configuration in the web interface:

1. Chick Maintenance and Factory Defaults.

2. Click Yes.

Figure 5-3: The Factory Defaults

Parameter description:

Buttons

Keep IP setup :

Check "Keep IP setup" if you want to keep current IP setting

Yes :

Click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults.

No :

Click to return to the Port State page without restarting.

NOTE:

Restoring factory default can also be performed by making a physical

loopback between port 1 and port 2 within the first minute from

switch reboot. In the first minute after boot, 'loopback' packets will be

transmitted at port 1. If a 'loopback' packet is received at port 2 the

switch will do a restore to default

368 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

368 368

5-4 Firmware

This section describes how to upgrade Firmware. The Switch can be enhanced with more

value-added functions by installing firmware upgrades.

5-4.1 Firmware upgrade

This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch.

Web Interface

To configure a Firmware Upgrade Configuration in the web interface:

1. Chick Browser to select Maintenance/Software in you device.

2. Click Download.

Figure 5-4.1: The firmware Download

Parameter description:

Buttons

Force Cool Restart :

Uncheck "Force Cool Restart" if you want to perform a warm restart of the switch after the

software upload.

Check "Force Cool Restart" if you want to simulate a power-on (cold restart) of

the switch after the software upload.

WARNING: Forcing a cool restart will affect the traffic going through

the switch.

Browse :

Click the Browse... button to search the Firmware URL and filename and click Upload.

NOTE: This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the

switch. Uploading software will update all managed switches to the

location of a software image and click. After the software image is

uploaded, a page announces that the firmware update is initiated.

After about a minute, the firmware is updated and all managed

switches restart. the switch restarts.

Brows

e...

369 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

369 369

WARNING: While the firmware is being updated, Web access appears

to be defunct. The front LED flashes Green/Off with a frequency of 10

Hz while the firmware update is in progress. Do not restart or power

off the device at this time or the switch may fail to function

afterwards.

370 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

370 370

5-4.2 Firmware Selection

This page provides information about the active and alternate (backup) firmware images in the

device, and allows you to revert to the alternate image.

The web page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware

images.

NOTE: In case the active firmware image is the alternate image, only

the "Active Image" table is shown. In this case, the Activate Alternate

Image button is also disabled.

If the alternate image is active (due to a corruption of the primary

image or by manual intervention), uploading a new firmware image

to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and

activate this.

The firmware version and date information may be empty for older

firmware releases. This does not constitute an error.

Web Interface

To configure a Firmware Upgrade Configuration in the web interface:

1. Chick Browser to select Maintenance/Software in you device.

2. Click Image Select.

Figure 5-4.2: The Firmware selection

Parameter description:

Image Information

Image :

The flash index name of the firmware image. The name of primary (preferred) image is

image, the alternate image is named image.bk.

Version :

The version of the firmware image.

371 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

371 371

Date :

The date where the firmware was produced.

Buttons

Activate Alternate Image :

Click to use the Activate Alternate Image. This button may be disabled depending on

system state.

Cancel :

Cancel activating the backup image. Navigates away from this page.

372 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

372 372

5-5 Configuration

The switch stores its configuration in a number of text files in CLI format. The files are either

virtual (RAM-based) or stored in flash on the switch.

There are three system files:

running-config: A virtual file that represents the currently active configuration on the

switch. This file is volatile.

startup-config: The startup configuration for the switch, read at boot time.

default-config: A read-only file with vendor-specific configuration. This file is read when

the system is restored to default settings.

It is also possible to store up to two other files and apply them to running-config, thereby

switching configuration.

5-5.1 Save startup-config

This copies running-config to startup-config, thereby ensuring that the currently active

configuration will be used at the next reboot.

Web Interface

To save running configuration in the web interface:

1. Chick Browser to select Maintenance/Configuration in you device.

2. Click Apply Startup-Config Select.

Figure 5-5.1: The Save Startup Configuration

Parameter description:

Buttons

Save Configuration:

Click to save configuration, the running configuration will be written to flash memory for

system boot up to load this startup configuration file.

373 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

373 373

5-5.2 Download

This section describes to export the Switch Configuration for maintenance needs. Any current

configuration files will be exported as text format.

It is possible to download a file from the web browser to all the files on the switch, except

default-config, which is read-only.

Select the file to download, select the destination file on the target, and click.

If the destination is running-config, the file will be applied to the switch configuration. This

can be done in two ways:

Replace mode: The current configuration is fully replaced with the configuration in the

downloaded file.

Merge mode: The downloaded file is merged into running-config.

If the file system is full (i.e. contains the three system files mentioned above plus two other

files), it is not possible to create new files, but an existing file must be overwritten or another

deleted first.

Web Interface

To download configuration in the web interface:

1. Chick Browser to select Maintenance/Configuration in you device.

2. Click Download Select.

Figure 5-5.2: Configuration Download

Parameter description:

Buttons

Download :

Click the Download button then the switch will start to download the configuration from

configuration stored location PC or Server.

374 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

374 374

5-5.3 Upload

The configuration upload function will be backuped and saved configuration from the

switchs configuration into the running web browser PC.

It is possible to upload any of the files on the switch to the web browser. Select the file and

click Upload of running-config may take a little while to complete, as the file must be

prepared for upload.

Web Interface

To upload configuration in the web interface:

1. Chick Browser to select Maintenance/Configuration in you device.

2. Click upload Select.

Figure 5-5.3: Configuration upload

Parameter description:

running-config :

the file will be applied to the switch configuration. This can be done in two ways:

Replace mode: The current configuration is fully replaced with the configuration in the

uploaded file.

Merge mode: The uploaded file is merged into running-config.

startup-config :

The startup configuration for the switch, read at boot time.

default-config :

A read-only file with vendor-specific configuration. This file is read when the system is

restored to default settings.

Buttons

Upload Configuration :

Click the Upload button then the running web management PC will start to upload the

configuration from the managed switch configuration into the location PC, user can

configure web browsers upload file path to keep configuration file.

Browse ...

375 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

375 375

5-5.4 Activate

It is possible to activate any of the configuration files present on the switch, except for

running-config which represents the currently active configuration.

Select the file to activate and click. This will initiate the process of completely replacing the

existing configuration with that of the selected file.

Web Interface

To activate configuration in the web interface:

1. Chick Browser to select Maintenance/Configuration in you device.

2. Click Activate Select.

Figure 5-5.4: Configuration Activation

Parameter description:

default-config :

A read-only file with vendor-specific configuration. This file is read when the system is

restored to default settings.

Buttons

Activate Configuration :

Click the Activate button then the default-config or startup-config file will be activated and

to be this switch's running configuration.

376 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

376 376

5-5.5 Delete

It is possible to delete any of the writable files stored in flash, including startup-config. If this

is done and the switch is rebooted without a prior save operation, this effectively resets the

switch to default configuration.

Web Interface

To delete configuration in the web interface:

1. Chick Browser to select Maintenance/Configuration in you device.

2. Click Delete Select.

Figure 5-5.5: Delete Configuration

Parameter description:

Buttons

Delete Configuration :

Click the Delete button then the startup-config file will be deleted, this effectively resets the

switch to default configuration.

377 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

377 377

5-6 Server Report

It is possible to download server report file on the switch to the web browser.

Download of server-report may take a little while to complete, as the file must be prepared

for download.

Web Interface

To delete configuration in the web interface:

1. Chick Maintenance and Server Report.

2. Click Download Server Report.

Figure 5-6: Server Report

Parameter description:

Buttons

Download Server Report :

Download server report file on the switch to the web browser.

378 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

378 378

Chapter 6 Surveillance

6-1 Surveillance 1. It is recommended to use IE10 or IE11 to open a web console with the PoE switch.

2. This PoE switch is specifically designed for surveillance applications. It comes with an integrated

Surveillance interface for ease of configuration. The Surveillance interface is accessed through a

tabbed menu, and the configuration changes made in its window have a higher priority than

those in the Switch configuration menus.

6-1.1 INTRODUCTION (for the Surveillance functions):

1. All devices connected to the switches can be discovered and displayed automatically using

standard networking protocols such as LLDP, UPnP, ONVIF, Bonjour, etc.

2. Users can operate the features below via an intuitive web GUI.

- Power down, remotely, the IP cameras, NVRs, or any PoE devices.

- Identify where exactly the broken cable is, remotely.

- Detect abnormal traffic issues on IP cameras/NVR.

379 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

379 379

- Monitor devices status intuitively, e.g., link up, PoE power, traffic, etc.

- Configure VLAN/QoS intuitively for better solution quality/reliability.

3. The interface supports up to 1000 devices.

The interface is designed to be extremely easy-to-use/manage/install IP Phone, IP Camera, or Wifi-AP

for enterprise applications.

User can deploy IP Device through the Topology/ Floor/ Map View to installation location, and through

Diagnostics and Traffic Monitor, they may also check link status and monitor throughput as well.

6-2 Management

6-2.1 Surveillance Mode

Surveillance Mode: Enable/ Disable the Surveillance function, or configure the mode with High

Priority for Master switch.

Total Device: Displays how many IP devices are detected and displayed in the topology view.

On-Line Devices: Displays how many IP devices on-line in the topology view.

Off-Line Device: Displays how many IP devices are currently off-line in the topology view.

Controller IP: Displays the Master switch IP (the IP of the PoE switch that you configure

surveillance mode as high priority.

IP Setting: Configure switch network settings.

DHCP Server Setting: Enable/disable DHCP server.

380 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

380 380

6-2.2 Device List

It will show all devices and their information which are detected by Surveillance.

A. If you want the PoE switch to automatically refresh the information then you

need to evoke the Auto refresh function.

B. Click this button to Refresh the status of all devices.

C. Click this button to Edit Device Name, http Port and camera password.

User can press the Edit button to edit device name and HTTP port for each IP device. This

function can also be configured in the Dashboard of Topology view.

There is no HTTP connection function for Unknown Device and PC type devices, therefore,

the UI doesnt provide Edit HTTP port function for them.

D

C B

A

E

381 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

381 381

D. Search devices by keying words with full text search.

E. The Remove function only applies to the Offline devices.

Note:

The device name will not be saved until you click the Apply button. Please do not click on the refresh,

auto-refresh or edit buttons before you apply new device name.

6-3 VVTK Camera & Encoder

6-3.1 VVTK Device List

This page displays the status of all VIVOTEK IP Cameras and video servers currently connected

to your switch as well as all the devices in the network that the switch can access.

Web interface

To configure Surveillance Camera & Encoder in the web interface:

1. Click Surveillance > Management > VVTK Camera & Encoder > VVTK Device List.

2. Click on a devices MAC address to configure the general Network setting.

3. Click on the IP address to opens a web interface of the IP camera (or video server).

4. Click the Apply button for the configuration to take effect.

382 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

382 382

Parameter description:

Select:

Use the checkbox in the Select column to Remove, Reboot, or restore the Default of a

device.

Status:

Device link state (On/Off Line)

Model Name:

VIVOTEK Camera & Encoder model name

Device Name:

VIVOTEK Camera & Encoder device name

Edit Device Name:

VIVOTEK Camera & Encoder device name edit

MAC:

Camera & Encoder device MAC address. It is also a hyper-link that opens the devices

General Network Setting page.

IP Address:

383 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

383 383

Camera & Encoder device IP address. It is also a hyper-link that opens a web Interface.

IP State:

Dynamic IP or Static IP.

Version:

VIVOTEK Camera & Encoder devices firmware version

Device Status and Functional Buttons

Refresh :

Refresh and poll the connection statuses from the connected devices. You may

also select the Auto-refresh checkbox. The switch will update the connection status by every

one second.

Edit device name :

Click the button. The device Name of IP cameras will become editable. You can then enter a

new name in the text box.

Remove:

Select the checkbox in front of a device, and then click the Remove button to remove a

device from the list.

Reboot:

Select the checkbox in front of a device, and then click the Reboot button to re-start a

device. Rebooting a device can sometimes restore an IP camera from a faulty state.

Restore Default:

Select the checkbox in front of a device, and then click the Restore default button to restore

its firmware default.

Translate dynamic IP to static IP:

By default, VIVOTEKs IP cameras listen to a DHCP server for a dynamic IP. This button sets

their dynamic IPs (that are currently in use) into static IPs. Using a static IP can avoid the

change of IPs when devices need to be re-started.

NOTE: The Search function on the Device list page supports search entry by Model Name,

MAC address, or IP addresses.

384 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

384 384

6-3.2 Camera Configure

Config Export

Web interface

To configure Surveillance Information in the web interface:

1. Click Surveillance > Management > VVTK Camera & Encoder > Camera Configure >

Config Export

2. Select the Device to export the configuration file from. You can export IP cameras

configuration profile (128KB in size) to the client computer or to the switch itself. Note that

if you choose to export to the switch, you can store up to 39 copies of camera

configuration profile.

The Search box supports filtering find of devices using Model Name, MAC address, or IP

addresses.

IMPORTANT: If you need to export the configuration to a client computer, a TFTP server

is required in your network. The configuration profile is transported via a TFTP server.

3. Click Start.

Config Import

Web interface

To configure Camera config. in the web interface:

1. Click Surveillance > Management > VVTK Camera & Encoder > Camera Configure >

Config Import.

2. Select the Device to import the configuration file from client PC.

3. Select the IP camera to load the configuration file to, using a single-click on its checkbox.

4. Click the Apply button.

385 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

385 385

6-3.2 Config import from client PC

6-3.2 Config import from switch

Config Files

Web interface

To display configuration files currently stored on the switch:

1. Click Surveillance > Management > VVTK Camera & Encoder > Camera Configure >

Config File.

2. You can select configuration files and delete these files by selecting their checkboxes, and

click the Delete button. Or you may download the configuration file to the client PC using

the Download button.

3. You can also export the files to a TFTP server by entering the TFTP address, checking the

files to be uploaded, and click the Export To button.

IMPORTANT: If you need to export the configuration to a client computer, a TFTP server is

required in your network. The configuration file is transported via a TFTP server.

386 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

386 386

6-4 Unmanaged Device List

An Un-managed VIVOTEK camera is the ones that come with unknown Root password. From this

page you can force to change the Root password for batch VIVOTEK cameras. When a new Root

password is applied, the unmanaged VIVOTEK cameras will be manageable.

Web interface

To configure Surveillance Un-managed Devices VVTK Camera in the web interface:

1. Click Surveillance > Management > VVTK Camera & Encoder > Unmanaged Device List

2. Enter a Password (blank also applies).

3. Click the Apply button

387 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

387 387

Parameter description:

Administrator Username:

Root (system administrator default and cannot be changed).

Administrator Password:

The Root password that will be applied to the selected device(s).

Chapter 7 Surveillance Graphical Monitoring

7-1 Topology View

Web interface

To configure Surveillance Topology View in the web interface:

1. Click Surveillance > Graphical Monitoring > Topology View.

2. To reveal details of a device, mouse over a device to display its device name, model name,

MAC, IP, and status.

3. You can click on a device to display the quick access menu.

1 Login Opens the web console with the camera.

2 Diagnostics Diagnoses the network connectivity with the device.

3 Live Stream Displays a live stream (stream 1) window. For multi-sensor models, only channel 1 video stream will be displayed.

4 Management Directs to the camera general network setting page.

5 Default Restores back to factory default settings.

6 PoE Reboot Reboots the camera.

7 Notification Displays event messages from the camera/device.

8 Monitor Displays the throughput threshold configuration page.

388 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

388 388

The quick access menu is also available on the Floor View and Google Map.

The Live Stream feature applies in the following browser versions:

Chrome

V39

above

Chrome

V38

under

Firefox

v39

IE11 IE10 IE9 IE8

WinXP No Yes Yes -- -- -- No

Win7 No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

Win8/8.1 No Yes Yes Yes YEs No No

You will also need to enable the QuickTime plug-ins for your browser. For example, try

using the chrome://plugins command in your URL address field on Chrome.

4. For example, you can use the Diagnostics function to figure out whether there is a link

problem to a device. The switch sends test packets to verify the link connectivity between

switch port and camera. This helps when diagnosing cabling problems in your

deployments.

389 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

389 389

390 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

390 390

Figure 7-1.1: Topology View

See below for the sample screen and mouse control:

You can also configure VLAN grouping in the Topology View. To configure grouping, proceed with the following:

1. Enable the Grouping mode by selecting the Group menu from the Device List menu.

Select New Group from the pull-down menu. Single-click IP cameras or servers to include

them into group. When configuring an existing group, select an existing group.

2. Select the members you prefer from the topology.

3. Enter a Group name, Description, and a unique VLAN ID. See the previous chapter for

details. VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE

802.1Q-2003. A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID. A value

of 0 (Priority Tagged) is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as

defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003, meaning that only the IEEE 802.1D priority level is

significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead.

Organizationally Unique Identifiers (OUI) are the first three bytes of a MAC

Address, while the last three bytes contain a unique station ID. You can add a

specific manufacturer with the OUI. Enter the first 3 octets as the hexadecimal

000000 to specify the device range.

4. When done, click the Apply button for the configuration to take effect. Click the Save

button to save your configuration.

391 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

391 391

Figure 7-1.2: Configuring Grouping in the Topology View

A VLAN can also span across multiple switches. Select devices on multiple switches to join them into

the same VLAN. They will be automatically tagged into a VLAN.

Group Setting Console

Users can configure VLAN groups for each IP device using the OUI or selecting device

icons, and configure traffic priority (0~7) for each VLAN group.

The configuration uses Mac Based VLAN to isolate groups.

One IP device only can join one VLAN group.

Function

A. Group devices by filtering, searching, clicking

device icons, or specifying OUI.

B. Configure traffic priority for the VLAN.

C. Assign a VLAN ID or Name to the Group.

C

B

A

392 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

392 392

System Setting Console

A

B

C

D

Function

A. The number of IP devices is displayed here in the

topology view.

B. Displays the IP of the Master PoE switch.

C. You can enable/disable DHCP server.

D.

- Single Subnet: The Surveillance feature will base on

the master switchs IP address. Here the subnet mask

is 255.255.255.0.

- Multiple Subnet: To provide 4 ranges for manual

configuration. In the case, it is recommended to to

change the switchs subnet mask to 255.255.0.0.

This also avoids IP devices from not being

recognized.)

393 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

393 393

You can use the device menu to select or deselect the types of device information on screen, e.g., MAC

address, or Device Name. Note that only 4 types of information can be displayed at one time.

Device picture

Icon in black: The device is connected. User can select function and check

issues.

Icon in red: Device is not connected. User can diagnose the link status.

Icons with numbers: It means some events have happened (e.g. Device

Off-line, IP Duplicateetc.) on the IP device, users can click on the device icon to

check events in Notification.

Icon with a question mark: It means the IP device is detected by the

Surveillance feature, but the device type cant be recognized. The device is classified

as an unknown device type.

An unmanaged device is displayed with a no entry mark. The information for such device will be

limited.

394 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

394 394

You can preserve your configuration by taking a snapshot of your current topology. Note that if using

IE browser, you can only export in the SVG format.

If you click on a surveillance switch, a PoE Config function is available that allows you to control the PoE

output on all switch ports, and to enable or disable the Auto Checking function. The Auto Checking

function intermittently examines the status of powered devices, and report disconnection issue when

the powered device cannot be reached.

Different device type supports different function:

- If an IP device is recognized as a Surveillance switch, it will support

Upgrade, PoE Config, and the Find Switch functions.

- If an IP device is recognized as a PoE device, it will support PoE Reboot

function in addition to the Upgrade and Find Switch functions.

Device Type: This entry appears automatically. If an unknown type is detected,

user can still select a device type from a pre-defined list.

Device Name: Create your own Device Name or alias for easy management such

as, 1F_Lobby_Cam1.

Model Name, MAC Address, IPv4 Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, PoE Supply

and PoE Used are displayed automatically by the Surveillance functions.

Http Port: A re-assign http port number to the device for better security.

DHCP Client: Enable or Disable the DHCP client. If this feature is enabled, the

system will configure the IPv4 address and network mask of the interface using

the DHCP protocol. The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name

as hostname to provide DNS lookup.

Login: Click the Login Action Icon to log in the device via http for further

configuration or status monitoring.

Upgrade: Click to upgrade the software version.

395 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

395 395

Find Switch: When this feature is activated, the switch LEDs will all light

up and flicker for 15 seconds.

PoE Config: Click it to configure the PoE function, enable/disable PoE

Auto Checking or enable/disable PoE mode on a per port basis.

PoE Reboot: When necessary, click to reboot the device remotely so as

to restore a device back to its normal operation.

Streaming: Click to display the video images streaming, if the device

supports this feature.

Icon with blank node: When a PoE switch detects more than two IP

devices from the same port, the switch cant resolve this IP devices layout,

instead, it will display a blank node to present this situation. Users can use the

Parent Node function to adjust layout on the Dashboard.

Notification Console: This window displays alarms and event logs.

Monitor Console: This window displays the traffics for device health check purpose.

Except PoE switch, users can configure throughput thresholds for each IP device.

Users will receive event notifications when throughput is lower or higher than

your configuration.

If both values are 0, it means the function is disabled.

The polling interval is 1 second. When the page is closed, the Polling interval will

change to 5 seconds.

396 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

396 396

If you click on switch + or -, it will retract the subtree infrastructure.

7-2 Floor View

In this page, the administrator can place a device per time onto the custom image, which you

have already uploaded, by dragging-and-dropping markers in the device list.

You can upload up to 10 map files in JPG and PNG formats, with the limitation of 512KB in file

size each.

Web interface

To configure the surveillance Floor View in the web interface:

1. Click Surveillance > Graphical Monitoring > Floor View.

2. Select a floor map you uploaded. You can prepare and upload one or multiple floor maps

in the Surveillance > Maintenance > Floor Image window.

397 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

397 397

3. You then select a device on the Device List by a single click. A similar bubble icon will

appear on screen. Click and drag the icon to a preferred location on the map.

4. Repeat the above process until you finish the map setup, and click the Apply button.

5. With multiple maps in your deployment, e.g., different floor or building, select a different

floor view from the pull-down menu on top and continue with the configuration.

6. Click the Save button to save your configuration.

398 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

398 398

Figure 7-2.1: Floor View

When the configuration is done, use the Snapshot function on the upper right of the screen to export

your configuration. The file format can be SVG, PNG, or PDF (Chrome and Firefox).

Note that if using IE browser, you can only export files in the SVG format.

399 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

399 399

7-3 Map View

On this page, you can view a realistic representation of devices through the Google map. This

Map View applies in wide area, outdoor deployments. The preconditions for using this function

are:

1. The client computer having a web session with the PoE switch must have an Internet

connection.

Web interface

To configure Surveillance Map View in the web interface:

1. Click Surveillance > Graphical Monitoring > Map View.

2. On the Google map, move to your location, and zoom in to a preferred view. To move on

the screen, click and hold down your left mouse button to move to a preferred direction.

You can also key in the address you have in mind in the Search box, e.g., Sunset Boulevard,

Los Angeles, etc. The GPS location of your current position is also supported.

3. Click to select a device. The device will appear on the map.

4. Click and drag the device to a preferred location.

5. Repeat the above process to complete the map setup, and click Apply to finish the

configuration.

Figure 7-3.1: Map View

To return to a location you previously visited, simply click on a camera or device (on the Device List)

you implanted on the map. The current map view will move back to the location you previously

configured. An implanted camera will be indicated by a bubble icon with a dim out color.

400 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

400 400

To remove a camera from a Google map, click on the

cameras cross mark from the Device List, and the

camera will disappear from map.

The quick access menu is also available on the Google Map.

1 Login Opens the web console with the camera.

2 Diagnostics Diagnoses the network connectivity with the device.

3 Live Stream Displays a live stream (stream 1) window. For multi-sensor models, only channel 1 video stream will be displayed.

4 Management Directs to the camera general network setting page.

5 Default Restores back to factory default settings.

6 PoE Reboot Reboots the camera.

7 Notification Displays event messages from the camera/device.

8 Monitor Displays the throughput threshold configuration page.

401 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

401 401

Chapter 8 Surveillance - Maintenance

8-1 Floor Image

In this page, you can upload or manage floor map images. Due to the limitation of the flash

memory, up to 20 JPEG images, each of a max. of 256KB size, can be uploaded to the switch.

Web interface

To configure the Floor Image in the web interface:

1. Click Surveillance > Floor Plan > Floor Image.

2. Click Browse to select Floor image from the client computer. Enter a name for the Name

entry.

3. Click Add to upload. When done, a snapshot will be available on screen.

4. If you need to remove an existing floor map, select its checkbox and click Delete to

remove.

Figure 8-1.1: Floor Image

402 User Manual rev. 2.0. JAN. 2018

402 402

8-2 Diagnostics

In this page, you can troubleshoot the connection between PoE switch and IP Devices. This

feature is designed primarily for administrators to verify and test the link routes between the

switch and the IP device. Note that the topology of network needs to be saved for this function

to work properly.

Web interface <

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the AW-GEV-107A-130 Vivotek works, you can view and download the Vivotek AW-GEV-107A-130 Switch User Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the User Manual for Vivotek AW-GEV-107A-130 as well as other Vivotek manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The User Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Vivotek AW-GEV-107A-130. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Vivotek AW-GEV-107A-130 Switch User Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Vivotek AW-GEV-107A-130 Switch User Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Vivotek AW-GEV-107A-130 Switch User Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Vivotek AW-GEV-107A-130 Switch User Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Vivotek AW-GEV-107A-130 Switch User Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.